Category: Legacy

Introduction

I’m assuming you are referring to the history of the Legacy brand. Legacy is a subsidiary of Subaru, a Japanese automaker, and is known for producing high-performance sports sedans and wagons. Here is a brief overview of the history of the Legacy brand:

The Legacy was first introduced in 1989 as a mid-size sedan and wagon. It was designed to replace the Subaru Leone, which was a popular model in Japan and other markets.
The Legacy quickly gained a reputation for its sporty handling and all-wheel drive system, which provided excellent traction and stability on all types of road surfaces. It was also known for its high level of safety, thanks to features such as ABS brakes and dual airbags.
Over the years, the Legacy has undergone several updates and redesigns, with each new generation introducing new features and technologies. The current generation of the Legacy was introduced in 2019 and features a sleek, modern design, advanced safety features, and a range of high-tech amenities.
In addition to its standard sedan and wagon models, the Legacy has also been offered in a range of performance-oriented variants, such as the Legacy GT, Legacy STI, and Legacy Spec B. These models feature upgraded engines, suspension systems, and other performance enhancements that make them popular among driving enthusiasts.
The Legacy has won numerous awards and accolades over the years, including being named the 2020 Best Resale Value in its class by Kelley Blue Book and receiving a Top Safety Pick+ rating from the Insurance Institute for Highway Safety.

Overall, the Legacy has a long and impressive history, and continues to be a popular choice among drivers who value performance, safety, and reliability.

Legacy can refer to several different things depending on the context, but in general, the term “legacy” refers to something that has been inherited or passed down from previous generations. Here are a few common uses of the term “legacy”:

Legacy can refer to a person’s or a group’s accomplishments or contributions that continue to have an impact long after they are gone. For example, the legacy of a great leader might include their ideas, policies, and influence on future generations.
Legacy can also refer to the assets or property that someone leaves behind when they die. This can include money, real estate, investments, and other valuables that are passed down to heirs or beneficiaries.
In a business context, legacy can refer to outdated technology or systems that are still in use, but may be less efficient or effective than newer alternatives. Legacy systems can be difficult and costly to maintain, and can hinder a company’s ability to adapt to changing market conditions.
Legacy can also refer to a brand or product that has a long and storied history, and is associated with quality, reliability, and innovation. For example, the Legacy brand of sports cars and sedans produced by Subaru is known for its advanced engineering and high-performance capabilities.

Overall, the term “legacy” is often used to describe something that has enduring value and significance, whether that be in the form of ideas, property, or a brand name.

What we are doing?

We are publishing the Legacy user guides, User Manuals, Owner Instructions. Everything you need to know about your Legacy vechicles to get any fixes. Get the Owner’s Manual for your specific Legacy online.

Readable and Downloadable

Find information on how to operate your Legacy Vechicles manuals. Read the complete and specific sections and Download your manual if you have to.
Legacy User Guides – Autouserguide.com

Legacy Subaru

Subaru Impreza 2023 Seatbelts Base Sedan User Guide

Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose-fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more persons – even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly re-strained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child’s height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint systems in the REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to “Child Restraint Systems” 􀀁P59.

This vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record whether the seatbelt is in use by the front passenger when an SRS frontal, side or curtain airbag deploys.

Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is suitable for this vehicle. Refer to “Child Restraint Systems” 􀀁P59.

Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be used. Never place the shoulder belt under the child’s arm or behind the child’s back.

Expectant mothers

WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seatbelt by the front passenger when any of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploy.

Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint systems” 1-25.

Children

WARNING
Place children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child’s height and weight.

Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/ELR has an additional locking mode, “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode”, intended to secure a child restraint system.
The ALR mode functions as follows. When the seatbelt is once drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
For instructions on how to install the child restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to “Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt” 􀀁P64.
When the child restraint system is re-moved, make sure that the retractor is restored to the Emergency Locking Re-tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-belt to retract fully.

Seatbelt warning light and chime

Refer to “Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime” 􀀁P179.

Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING

Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.
Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.
Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.

Front seatbelts

Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-back to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible.
Sit well back in the seat.
Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
- If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
- If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click
To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt.
Place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips, not on the waist.

Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.

To raise:
Slide the anchor up.

To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor down.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place.

WARNING
When wearing seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

Unfastening the seatbelt

1 Button

Push the button on the buckle.
Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it from getting tangled or twisted

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt)

enter seatbelt tongue plate
Anchor tongue plate
Anchor buckle
Center seatbelt buckleIf

WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twist can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the anchor tongue plate into the mating buckle (on the right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.
Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twist can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the anchor tongue plate into the mating buckle (on the right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.

WARNING

Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the anchor tongue plate not fastened to the connector’s buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceiling.

1. Retrieve the anchor tongue plate from the slot in the recess by pulling the anchor tongue plate.
Pass the seatbelt through the belt guide.
Make sure that the “ ” mark on the anchor tongue plate and the “ ” mark on the buckle face outwards.
After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click sounds.
- If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
- If the belt still cannot be unlocked, give it a strong pull and let it retract slightly, then pull it out slowly again.
Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate into the center seatbelt buckle until it clicks.
To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips, not on the waist.

Unfastening the seatbelt

Button

Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.
When the seatback is folded down, it is necessary to disconnect the connector.
. Insert a tongue plate or other hard pointed object into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in. The anchor tongue plate will then disconnect from the buckle.
Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess and then insert the anchor tongue plate into the slot.

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the tongue plate could hit against the trim, causing damage to the trim.

Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly.
Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neatly stored.

Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use mild soap and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Replace the seatbelts even if an only minor damage is found.

CAUTION

Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating properly.

Subaru Impreza 2023 Top Accessories

[amalinkspro_table id=”32452″ new-window=”on” nofollow=”on” addtocart=”off” /]

Reference Links

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Impreza Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Subaru Ascent Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2023 Subaru WRX Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

2024 Subaru Crosstrek Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Impreza, Impreza 2023, Owner Manual, Seatbelts, Seats Restraints, Subaru, Subaru Impreza, Subaru Impreza 2023, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Parking Vehicle Touring XT Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Parking Your Vehicle Touring XT

Modern parking technologies are included in the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT to improve parking. In certain models, these amenities might even include automated parking assistance systems, parking sensors, and backup cameras. With or without parking sensors, the car’s parking capabilities are designed to make parking—in congested or open spaces—easy, safe, and precise. The Legacy Touring XT guarantees a hassle-free and confident parking experience for drivers with its cutting-edge parking systems.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Parking your vehicle

Electronic parking brake

Parking brake switch
Indicator light
Release the electronic parking brake
Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that you turn off the engine. Otherwise, the parking brake may be released and an accident may occur.
If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunction. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer.
If you operate the electronic parking brake when the brake is overheated or the vehicle is on a steep slope, the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. In this case, the vehicle may start to move and it may lead to an accident. Always use the tire stops.

CAUTION

When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction and the parking brake cannot be applied, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection. If you have to park your vehicle in such conditions, perform the following procedure.
Stop your vehicle in a flat location.
Shift the select lever in the “P” position. When the select lever cannot be shifted into the “P” position, you must release the shift lock. Refer to “Shift lock function”.
Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.
Never drive with the parking brake applied. Doing so will cause unnecessary brake pad wear. Before driving off, always make sure that the parking brake has been released and the brake system warning light has turned off.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic parking brake. You can apply/release the parking brake by operating the parking brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake switch firmly while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and the brake pedal is depressed. When the parking brake is applied while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate. Refer to “Brake system warning light (red)”.

NOTE

If you press the parking brake switch under the following conditions, the parking brake will not be released.
- The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
- You are not depressing the brake pedal.
The electronic parking brake system uses motors to apply the parking brake. Therefore, operating sounds from the motors will be heard when applying or releasing the parking brake. Make sure that the motor sounds are heard when applying or releasing the parking brake.
If you operate the parking brake switch under the following conditions, a chirp will sound and the electronic parking brake indicator light will flash.
When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction.
When the electronic parking brake operation is prohibited temporarily.
When you cannot release the parking brake due to, for example, a system malfunction, contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the parking brake.
If you stop operating the electronic parking brake switch midway or operate extremely slowly, the system may detect an error and turn on the brake system warning light. However, this does not indicate a malfunction if the brake system warning light turns off after operating the switch.
When the electronic parking brake has not been used for a long period, the electronic parking brake may operate automatically after the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. This occurs due to checking the proper operation of the electronic parking brake and does not indicate a malfunction.
If you cannot release the electronic parking brake due to the switch malfunction, refer to the instructions described in “Automatic release function by accelerator pedal” P343. After activating the electronic parking brake, you may hear a short sound several minutes after the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates as the system confirms proper engagement. This sound is different from the apply and release sound.

This can occur:

If the brakes are extremely hot.
If the electronic parking brake is applied after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
This is a normal operating sound under any of these conditions.
The Auto Start-Stop system is deactivated while the electronic parking brake is applied.
If you operate the electronic parking brake switch while the Auto Start-Stop system is activated, the Auto Start Stop system will be deactivated. The electronic parking brake
will activate after the engine is restarted. After the electronic parking brake indicator light is illuminated, release your foot from the brake pedal.
When starting the engine or restarting the engine using the Auto Start-Stop system, if you operate the electronic parking brake switch, the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash temporarily. How- ever, this is not a malfunction if the light turns off after the parking brake is deactivated.

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal electronic

The parking brake will be automatically released by depressing the accelerator pedal. However, the automatic release function does not operate under the following conditions.

Any door (other than the rear gate) is open.
The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

If the parking brake is automatically released, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch turn off.! Auto Vehicle Hold function The Auto Vehicle Hold function will automatically keep the vehicle stopped even after releasing the brake pedal when the vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at traffic signals.

WARNING

Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function on a steep hill or slippery road. The vehicle may move even when using the Auto Vehicle.
Hold function, causing serious injury or accidents.
Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function to park the vehicle. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents. Make sure to shift the select lever to the “P” position and apply the electronic parking brake in the following cases.
When you are going to park your vehicle.
When passengers are getting in or out of the vehicle.
When you are loading or unloading.
When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, do not release the brake pedal before the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator
illuminates. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.
Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold function in the following cases. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.
When washing your vehicle in an automatic car wash.
When being towed.

CAUTION

When stopping on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function turned on, the electronic parking brake may be automatically applied. Then the electronic parking brake indicator light will flash. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal while stopping. Otherwise, the vehicle may move.
When being towed, turn off the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTE
We recommend turning on the Auto Vehicle Hold function when stopping on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned off, the vehicle may roll backward when driving off.

To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle Hold function

Auto Vehicle Hold switch

Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light

To turn on:
Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light is OFF. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will illuminate.

To turn off:
Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light illuminates. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off.

NOTE

When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on, a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off and the brake system warning light will turn on.
Whenever starting the engine, the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be set to “OFF”.
If the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is pressed and held for more than 30 seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off, and the system will ignore any further pressing of the switch. To activate the function again, restart the engine.
When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is deactivated while the Auto Vehicle Hold function has a malfunction if 344 Parking your vehicle with the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated, the electronic parking brake may automatically apply after stopping, then the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal while stopped. Otherwise, the vehicle may move. When getting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle on a flat surface, then apply the electronic parking brake.
If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light does not illuminate even after pressing the Auto Vehicle Hold switch with the operating conditions met, the function may have malfunctioned. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
You may hear a sound while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is keeping your vehicle stopped. This is normal and does not represent a malfunction.
When you depress the brake pedal to release the Auto Vehicle Hold function, an operation sound or vibration may be generated, or the brake pedal may return slowly. This is not a malfunction.
While the vehicle is kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, depress the brake pedal firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may not operate.
When the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is pressed and held for more than 30 seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off and further operation of the switch will be ignored. To make the switch usable again, turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and then turn it to the “ON” position.

Emergency brake
Use the emergency brake only in case of an emergency. If the emergency brake is excessively used, the brake parts will wear down faster or the brake may not work sufficiently due to brake overheating.

NOTE
While using the emergency brake:

The electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate and
a chirping sound.
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment. This is the operating sound of the brake that is activated by the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and does not indicate a malfunction.

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can stop the vehicle by pulling the parking brake switch continuously. While applying the emergency brake, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate and a chirping sound.

Electronic parking brake system warning
If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking brake system may malfunction. Immediately stop your vehicle in the nearest safe location and contact your SUBARU dealer. If a malfunction occurs in the electronic parking brake system, the brake system warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic parking brake light”.

Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always perform the following items.

Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the select lever in the “P” position. Never rely on the mechanical friction of the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.

WARNING

Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people.
Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a bumper under guard (optional), pay attention to blocks and other obstructions on the ground when parking. The under spoiler could be damaged by contact with them.
The braking power of the parking brake may not be sufficient when stronger braking power is needed (e.g. when parking on a steep slope while towing a trailer).

Auto Start-Stop system
The Auto Start-Stop system is designed to automatically stop and restart the engine when the vehicle is stationary for a short period (while waiting for a traffic light or in a traffic jam) after the engine has warmed up. The system operates to reduce fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and undesired idling noise.

System operation
The Auto Start-Stop system is designed to automatically stop and restart the engine for a short period during idling. Do not use the system when parking the vehicle normally. So that it can be used safely and comfortably, in addition to driver operations, the Auto Start Stop system is designed to constantly monitor the vehicle conditions as well as the environment inside and outside the vehicle, to control stopping and restarting of the engine. After the vehicle has been completely stopped by depressing the brake pedal with the select lever in the “D” position, the engine will be automatically stopped. If you release the brake pedal with the select lever kept in the “D” position, the engine will be automatically restarted. However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light illuminates, the engine will not restart.

Auto Start-Stop indicator light (green)

If the engine is temporarily stopped by the system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate in green. This indicator light will turn off when the system restarts the engine.

NOTE

After starting the engine, if the vehicle is left idling without being driven, the Auto Start-Stop system will not operate.
Your vehicle is equipped with a special high-performance battery. When replacing the vehicle battery, be sure to replace it with a genuine SUBARU battery (or equivalent) designed specifically for use in a vehicle equipped with the Auto Start-Stop system. For details, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

Operational conditions

The engine can be automatically stopped by the Auto Start Stop system when all of the following conditions are met.
The engine is sufficiently warmed up.
The engine hood is closed.
The driver’s door is closed.
The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
The malfunction indicator light (Check Engine light) is off.*1
The airflow mode selection is set to a mode other than “ ” mode.
The rear window defogger is not in use. X-MODE has been turned off (if equipped).
After the vehicle is stopped, the engine will be automatically stopped when the following conditions are met.
The steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
The steering wheel is not being operated.

Even if the malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) is illuminated, the Auto Start Stop system may operate when the system recovers from the malfunction (Subaru Forester Wilderness models only).

NOTE

After the vehicle is stopped, the engine may not automatically stop under the following conditions.
The vehicle is stopped on a road with a steep slope.
The vehicle is stopped by hard braking.
After the vehicle is stopped, the engine may not automatically stop if the brake pedal is not fully depressed.
Make sure to depress the brake pedal firmly when stopping the vehicle.
In the following cases, it may take some time for the Auto Start Stop system to operate.
When the battery is discharged because the vehicle has not been used for a long period, etc.
The coolant temperature is low.
When the battery terminals have been reconnected after replacing the battery, etc.

Non-operational conditions
In any of the following cases, the Auto Start-Stop system will not operate.

When the Auto Start Stop warning light/ Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow) is illuminating or flashing.
When the malfunction indicator light (Check Engine light) is illuminating.*1
The electronic parking brake is applied.
When the engine hood is opened.
When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently warmed up.
When the temperature of the CVT fluid is abnormally high.
When the vehicle battery is not in good condition.
When using the climate control system, the temperature difference between the setting temperature and the temperature inside the vehicle is significant.
When using the climate control system, the amount of airflow is significant.

Even if the malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) is illuminated, the Auto Start Stop system may operate when the system recovers from the malfunction (Subaru Forester Wilderness models only).

NOTE
The Auto Start-Stop system may not operate in the following cases:

The malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light) or other warning lights on the combination meter are illuminated or flashing.
You are driving the vehicle in a high-elevation area. Engine restart operational conditions
In any one of the following cases, the engine will be automatically restarted even if the brake pedal is kept depressed.
When slightly releasing the brake pedal on a road with a steep slope the vehicle begins rolling
When further depressing the brake pedal
When depressing the accelerator pedal
When you move the select lever to the “R” position.
When turning the steering wheel
When operating the electronic parking brake switch
When activating X-MODE (if equipped)
When the airflow mode selection is set to “ ” mode.
When the climate control system can no longer maintain the set temperature.
When unbuckling the driver’s seatbelt
When opening the driver’s door
When activating the rear window defogger
When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is released, refer to the “Auto Vehicle Hold function”.

Engine restart non-operational conditions
Do not open the engine hood when the Auto Start Stop system is in operation. It may cause the vehicle to move while on a slope, the steering wheel operation may become heavy, or the brakes may not work well, which can create dangerous conditions. To ensure safety, the engine will not be automatically restarted if the engine hood is opened when the Auto Start Stop system is in operation, even if the brake pedal is released. In this case, check the surrounding area and restart the engine by Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light is illuminated, the engine will not restart normal operation.

NOTE

When the Auto Start-Stop system is in operation, the brake pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
When the battery is discharged, the engine will be automatically restarted even if you keep the brake pedal depressed.
In the following cases, the length of time that the engine is temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system may be shorter.
When the climate control system is in operation.
When the outside temperature is high, or when it is low (because the climate control system can no longer maintain the set temperature).
When consumption of electricity by electrical components is high.
When the engine is automatically restarted by the Auto Start-Stop system, the power provided via the accessory power outlet will be reduced. Depending on the connected appliance, the power of the appliance may temporarily turn off. Auto Start Stop warning light.

Auto Start-Stop warning light (yellow)

The Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate in yellow when initially turning the ignition switch to the “ON” position. The light will turn off after the engine has started. The Auto Start Stop warning light will flash when the Auto Start Stop system is malfunctioning. We recommend that you contact your authorized SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

CAUTION
If the Auto Start Stop warning light does not turn off after the engine has started, the Auto Start Stop system may be malfunctioning. We recommend that you contact your authorized SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

Auto Start-Stop OFF switch

Auto Start-Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)

Auto Start-Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)

If the Auto Start Stop OFF switch is pressed, the operation of the Auto Start-Stop system will be disabled. The Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light on the combination meter will then illuminate in yellow. If the switch is pressed once more, the Auto Start-Stop system will turn on again. The Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light will then turn off. While the engine is temporarily stopped by the system, if the Auto Start Stop OFF switch is pressed, the engine will be restarted even if you do not release the brake pedal.

NOTE

If the engine is restarted when the Auto Start Stop system is not operational and the ignition switch has been turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the Auto Start-Stop system will turn on again.
Be sure to turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position when leaving the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in the battery discharging. Auto Start-Stop No Activity Detected indicator light

Auto Start-Stop No Activity Detected indicator light

If the operational conditions are not met when the vehicle is stopped, the engine will not stop and the Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator light will illuminate. It will turn off when the vehicle begins to drive.

Displaying the Auto Start-Stop system status
Approximate indications of the time that the engine has been stopped by the Auto Start Stop system and/or the amount of fuel saved can be displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to “Basic screens”.

System warning
So that it can be used safely and comfortably, the Auto Start Stop system is designed to constantly monitor the vehicle conditions as well as the environment inside and outside the vehicle in addition to driver operations and to provide various warnings to the driver via the warning light and/or indicator light illuminating or flashing and a buzzer sounds. For details about the warning light and indicator light, refer to “Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto Start-Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)”

Warning buzzer
The buzzer will sound when the engine hood is opened while the engine is stopped by the Auto Start-Stop system. When this occurs, the buzzer will stop sounding when the following operations are performed.

The engine is restarted by normal operation. (Refer to “Preparing to drive”.
The ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

Display of warning messages
If a warning message is displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD) while driving, a malfunction may have occurred in the Auto Start-Stop system. In this case, the Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate or flash yellow. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

FAQ

Does the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT come with a backup camera?

Yes, it’s equipped with a backup camera.

Are parking sensors included in this model?

Yes, parking sensors are available to assist with parking.

Does the Touring XT have an automated parking assistance system?

Some models may have automated parking assistance systems.

What is the purpose of parking sensors?

Parking sensors help detect obstacles around the vehicle during parking.

How does the backup camera aid in parking?

The backup camera provides a clear view of the area behind the vehicle, aiding in parking and avoiding obstacles.

Can I disable the parking sensors if needed?

Yes, you can typically disable the parking sensors if desired.

What technology is used for the automated parking system?

The automated parking system may use cameras and sensors to assist in parking maneuvers.

Is there a maximum speed for using the automated parking feature?

The maximum speed for automated parking may be limited for safety reasons.

Are there specific parking modes for different situations?

Some vehicles have different parking modes, such as parallel parking or perpendicular parking modes.

Can I manually override the automated parking system?

Yes, you can usually override the system and take control if needed.

What safety features are in place to prevent accidents while parking?

Safety features may include collision detection and automatic braking.

Is there a maximum distance for the parking sensors to detect objects?

The maximum distance for detection may vary but is typically a few feet.

Are parking guidelines displayed on the backup camera screen?

Yes, many backup cameras display parking guidelines to assist with alignment.

Can I adjust the sensitivity of the parking sensors?

Sensitivity adjustments for parking sensors are often available.

Do parking features work in both forward and reverse?

Yes, parking features are typically available for both forward and reverse parking.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Parking your vehicle, Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Uniform Tire Quality Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Touring XT

A clever uniform tire quality system is fitted to the 2023 Subaru Legacy to guarantee both safety and maximum performance. This system offers a range of tire alternatives, including summer, winter, and all-season tires, each suited for a particular type of driving environment. In order to preserve tire integrity and vehicle stability, the car has a tire pressure monitoring system that warns the driver when tire pressure is low. It is imperative to do routine tire maintenance, which includes monitoring and modifying tire pressure, looking for wear, and following a tire rotation plan. It is crucial to use the recommended tires as stated on the tire inflation pressure label of the vehicle because the design and performance of the vehicle are optimized for particular tire sizes and kinds.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)

Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is attached to the driver’s side door pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows the original tire size, recommended cold tire inflation pressure on each tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity, and loading information

Adverse safety consequences of underinflation
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the tire(s). A possible resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressure. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items that may be replaced) of the automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-in-stalled equipment (whether installed or not).

Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords, and that is shaped to fit the rim.

Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead.

A bias ply tires A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the center-line of the tread.
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber, when inflated, bears the load.

Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall.

Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more.

Cord
The strands form the plies in the tire.

Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds.

Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side wall, or inner liner of the tire extending to cord material.
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning, and additional weight optional engine.
Extra load tire
A tire is designed to operate at higher loads and higher inflation pressure than the corresponding standard tire.
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs.
Inner liner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire.
Inner liner separation
The parting of the inner liner from cord material in the carcass.
Intended outboard sidewall
The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or The outward-facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounting on a vehicle.
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire is designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of

Curb weight
Accessory weight
Vehicle capacity weight
Production options weight
Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements.

Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 is appended to the end of this section. Occupant distribution The Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 is appended to the end of this section.
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or inner liner that extends to cord material.
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire.
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. . Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies.
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric steel, or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.
Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy-duty battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Recommended inflation pressure
The cold inflation pressure is recommended.
514 Tire information
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
Reinforced tire
A tire is designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code.
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges.
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead.
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the side wall.
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136-93 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces and that is marked with an Alpine Symbol “ ” on at least one sidewall.
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and it may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire.
Tread
That portion of a tire comes into contact with the road.
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.
Tread separation
Pulling away the tread from the tire carcass.
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves are designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load
on an individual tire is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
Vehicle normal load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 is appended to the end of this section) and dividing by 2.
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture was used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing.

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4	2	2 in front.
5 through 10	3	2 in front, 1 in second seat.
11 through 15	5	2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat.
16 through 22	7	2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat.

Tire care maintenance and safety practices

Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible. When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened.

Vehicle Load Limit – How to Determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. The vehicle placard also shows the seating capacity of your vehicle. The total load capacity includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their belongings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity can be calculated by the following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total weight of occupants + total weight of optional equipment + tongue load of a trailer (if applicable))

CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations
Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following

Examples 1

For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows

Calculate the total weight.
Calculate the available load capacity.
The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more
The result of step 2 shows that a further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can be carried.

Example 1

For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows.

Calculate the total weight.

The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

FAQ

What types of tires are available for the 2023 Subaru Legacy?

All-season, summer, and winter (snow) tires.

How does the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) work?

It sends a warning when tire pressure is severely low. The system activates only when the vehicle is driven.

How should I adjust tire pressure in different temperatures?

Inflate tires higher than the label’s recommended pressures if adjusting in a warmer environment than the outside.

How often should tire pressures be checked?

At least once a month and before long journeys.

Where can I find the recommended tire inflation pressures?

On the tire inflation pressure label located on the driver’s side door pillar.

What is wheel balance and why is it important?

Correct wheel balance ensures smooth driving and prevents steering and suspension problems. Wheels should be balanced regularly and after tire repairs or rotation.

How do I know when to replace my tires?

When the tread wear indicator becomes visible, indicating the tread depth is 0.063 inches (1.6 mm) or less.

Do tires on the Legacy have a specific rotational direction?

Some tires may have a specific rotational direction, indicated on the sidewall.

What is the tire rotation schedule for the Legacy?

Refer to the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” for the rotation schedule.

Can I use different sizes or types of tires on my Legacy?

No, all tires should match the size and construction specified on the tire inflation pressure label for optimal performance and safety.

What are the consequences of driving with underinflated tires?

It can cause severe tire flex, overheating, tread separation, and potential loss of vehicle control.

Why should tires be checked when cold?

Tire pressure increases when the tire warms up, so checking them cold gives a more accurate reading.

Is it necessary to use Subaru-brand tires only?

It’s recommended to use tires that match the specifications of the original equipment for safety and performance.

How does improper tire care affect the vehicle?

It can lead to reduced controllability, poor ride comfort, abnormal wear, and can impact speedometer and odometer accuracy.

What should I do if the TPMS warning light activates?

Check and adjust the tire pressures to the correct levels. If the light stays on, have the TPMS checked by a Subaru dealer.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Grading Standards, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, Uniform Tire Quality, Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Cooling system Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Cooling system Touring XT

The cooling system of the 2023 Subaru Legacy uses SUBARU SUPER COOLANT, which lasts for 11 years and 137,500 miles without needing to be changed, to efficiently regulate the engine’s temperature. A thermostatically regulated electric cooling fan is part of the system for best performance. Maintaining the coolant level between the “LOW” and “FULL” markings is imperative, particularly while the engine is cold. In order to prevent burns, the system emphasizes safety and warns against removing the radiator cover while the engine is hot. The car also requires particular parts, such as the differential gear oil, drive belts, and air cleaner element, all of which have various maintenance schedules and guidelines that are listed in the maintenance manual.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Cooling System

WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.

CAUTION

Vehicles are filled at the factory with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT which does not require the first change for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 years/220,000 km). This coolant should not be mixed with any other brand or type of coolant during this period. Mixing with a different coolant will reduce the life of the coolant. When necessary to top off the coolant for any reason, use only SUBARU SUPER COOLANT.
If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is diluted with another brand or type, the maintenance interval is shortened to that of the mixing coolant.
Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

Cooling Fan, Hose, and Connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be defective. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer. If the frequent addition of coolant is necessary between vehicle service visits, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, damage, or looseness.

Engine Coolant

Checking the coolant level

“FULL” level mark
“LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
If the level is close to or lower than the “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and refill the coolant up to just below the filler neck as shown in the following illustration.

After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the cap and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the proper position.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

Changing the coolant
It may be difficult to change the coolant. Has the coolant been changed by your SUBARU dealer if necessary? The coolant should be changed according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Air Cleaner Element
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.

CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner element, use a genuine SUBARU air cleaner element. If it is not used, there is the possibility of causing a negative effect on the engine. The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life shortened. The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is unnecessary to clean or wash the elements.

Replacing the Air Cleaner Element
Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

Clips

Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case (rear).
Open the air cleaner case and pull the cover rearward while lifting it up.
Remove the air cleaner element.
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is extremely soiled (for example, by sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and have the air cleaner cleaned.
If you find large foreign objects such as leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove the foreign objects.
Install a new air cleaner element in the way the longitudinal side and the transverse side face as shown in the illustration.
To install the air cleaner case (rear), insert the three projections on the air cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air cleaner case (front).
Install in the reverse order of removal.

2.4 L models

Clips

Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case (rear).
Open the air cleaner case and pull the cover rearward while lifting it up.
Remove the air cleaner element.
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is extremely soiled (for example, by sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and have the air cleaner case cleaned.
If you find large foreign objects such as leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove the foreign objects.
Install a new air cleaner element in the way the longitudinal side and the transverse side face as shown in the illustration.
To install the air cleaner case (rear), insert the three projections on the air cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air cleaner case (front).
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

Spark Plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer. The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Recommended Spark Plugs
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of the drive belt periodically because your engine is equipped with an automatic belt tension adjuster. However, the replacement of the belt should be done according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement. If the belt is loose, cracked or worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
There is no fluid level gauge. It is unnecessary to check the continuously variable transmission fluid level. However, if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer for inspection.

Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil
It is not necessary to check the gear oil level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the oil inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Recommended Grade and Viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together. For details, refer to “Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil”

CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other than the specified oil may cause a decline in vehicle performance.

FAQ

What type of coolant is used in the Legacy Touring XT?

It uses SUBARU SUPER COOLANT, which doesn’t require changing for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 years/220,000 km).

How often should the coolant be changed?

According to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

What should I do if the cooling fan doesn’t operate?

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary; if not resolved, have it checked by a SUBARU dealer.

How do I check the coolant level?

Check at each fuel stop; ensure the level is between “FULL” and “LOW” marks on the reservoir when the engine is cool.

Can I mix SUBARU SUPER COOLANT with other coolants?

No, mixing with other coolants can reduce the life of the coolant.

What should I do if I need to top off the coolant?

Use only SUBARU SUPER COOLANT for topping off.

Is it safe to open the radiator cap immediately after driving?

No, never remove the radiator cap until the engine has cooled down completely to avoid burns.

What precautions should I take when adding coolant?

Avoid spilling on hot engine components to prevent fire hazards.

Is there a fluid level gauge for the continuously variable transmission fluid?

No, and it is unnecessary to check the level; however, consult your dealer for inspection if necessary.

Do I need to check the front and rear differential gear oil levels?

It’s not necessary to check the levels but to inspect for cracks, damage, or leakage.

Should I check the drive belt deflection periodically?

No, the engine has an automatic belt tension adjuster, but replace the belt according to the maintenance schedule if it’s loose, cracked, or worn.

What happens if I operate the engine without the air cleaner element?

It could lead to engine backfires and potential burns; always use a genuine SUBARU air cleaner element.

How often should I replace the air cleaner element?

Replace it according to the maintenance schedule or more frequently under extremely dusty conditions.

What are the risks of using non-SUBARU air cleaner elements?

Using non-genuine parts may negatively affect the engine and shorten its lifespan.

Can the cooling system affect engine performance?

Yes, proper maintenance of the cooling system is crucial for optimal engine performance.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Cooling system, Legacy 2023, Maintenance Service Specification, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Maintenance tips Touring XT Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Maintenance Tips Touring XT

The 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT is equipped with an advanced maintenance system that guarantees the dependability and efficiency of the car. Regular engine oil changes with the specified grade and viscosity, cautious engine hood handling, and particular protocols for air cleaner element replacement and other component servicing are important maintenance considerations. It is crucial to take safety precautions, particularly when operating the All-Wheel Drive system or working inside the engine compartment. The vehicle’s paperwork contains a maintenance plan that emphasizes the significance of routine inspections and replacements of critical components. It also emphasizes the role that good maintenance plays in maintaining the car’s operation and compliance with warranty requirements.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Maintenance tips

Some clips and fender linings must be removed before replacing the air cleaner elements or specific bulbs.

Removing and reinstalling clips

Removing clips
There are several types of clips used for your vehicle.

Type A and D clips

Type D clips

Turn the clips counterclockwise using a flat-head screwdriver until the center portion of the clip is raised.
Remove the clips with a flat-head screwdriver using leverage.

Type B clips

Pull out the center portion of the clip using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in the illustration.
Pull the protruded center portion to remove the entire body of the clip.

Type C clips

Turn the clip counterclockwise using a Phillips screwdriver until the center portion of the clip is raised.
Remove the entire clip by pulling it up

Reinstalling clips

Insert the clip without the center portion first and then push the center portion of the clip into the hole.

Engine hood

Be extremely careful not to catch fingers or other objects when closing the engine hood.
Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
Be extremely careful opening the engine hood when the wind is strong. The engine hood could close suddenly, possibly causing injuries from slamming.
Do not install accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts to the engine hood. If the engine hood becomes too heavy, the stay may not be able to support holding it open.
Check that the end of the hood stay is inserted into the slot. If it is not inserted properly, the hood may drop and cause injury

To open the hood:

If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, return them to their original position.
Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.
Release the secondary hood release by moving the lever between the front grille and the hood toward the left.
Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer, and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the hood. Hold the grip for handling the hood prop.

To close the hood:

Lift the hood slightly remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer.
Lower the hood to a height of approximately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm) above its closed position and then let it drop.
After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.

WARNING
Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.

Engine compartment overview

Brake fluid reservoir
The main fuse box
Battery
Windshield washer tank
Engine oil filler cap
Engine coolant reservoir
Radiator cap
Engine oil filter
Engine oil level gauge
Air cleaner case

Models

Brake fluid reservoir
The main fuse box
Battery
Windshield washer tank
Engine oil filler cap
Engine coolant reservoir
Radiator cap
Engine oil filter
Engine oil level gauge
Air cleaner case

Engine oil

If the level gauge cannot be pulled out easily, twist the level gauge right and left, then gently pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured accidentally straining yourself.
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

Engine oil consumption
Some engine oil will be consumed while driving. The rate of consumption can be affected by such factors as transmission type, driving style, terrain, and temperature. Under the following conditions, oil consumption can be increased and may require refilling between maintenance intervals.

When the engine is new and within the break-in period.
When the engine oil is of lower quality.
When the incorrect oil viscosity is used.
When engine braking is employed (repeatedly).
When the engine is operated at high engine speeds (for extended periods of time).
When the engine is operated under heavy loads (for extended periods of time).
When towing a trailer
When the engine idles for extended periods of time.
When the vehicle is operated in stop-and-go and/or heavy traffic situations.
When the vehicle is used under severe thermal conditions.
When the vehicle accelerates and decelerates frequently.

Under these or similar conditions, you should check your oil at least every 2nd fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more frequently. Different drivers in the same car may experience different results. If your oil consumption rate is greater than expected, contact your authorized SUBARU dealer who may perform a test under controlled conditions.

Checking the oil level

Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ “OFF” position. If you check the oil level just after turning the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, wait for at least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.
2.5 L models
1. Oil level gauge
2. Oil filler cap
3. Oil filter
  CAUTION
  If the level gauge is not pulled out easily, twist the level gauge right and left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured accidentally straining yourself.
Pull out the oil level gauge again.
Be sure the level gauge is correctly inserted until it stops.
2.5 L models
1. Full level
2. Low level
3. Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt) from low level to full level
  2.4 L models
  1. Full level
  2. Low level
  3. Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. Check the oil level on both sides of the level gauge. The engine oil level must be judged by the lowest of the two levels. If the oil level is below the low-level mark, add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the engine oil filter when removing the oil filler cap. Doing so may result in a burn, a pinched finger, or may cause some other injury.
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil filler cap and slowly pour engine oil through the filler neck. After pouring oil into the engine, you must use the level gauge to confirm that the oil level is correct.

NOTE

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above the upper level when the engine is cold.
After adding or changing the engine oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a level surface, then start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirm that the warning light has turned off after the engine has started.

Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently made, or when driving in extremely cold weather.

NOTE

Changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a well-trained expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the engine oil and oil filter. Fully trained mechanics are on standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the special tools, spare parts, and recommended oil for this work, and also, Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently made, or when driving in extremely cold weather.
NOTE
Changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a well-trained expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the engine oil and oil filter. Fully trained mechanics are on standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the special tools, spare parts and recommended oil for this work, and also, self, observe the local regulations and dispose of waste oil properly.

Recommended grade and viscosity
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity. Refer to “Engine oil”

NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.

Synthetic oil
You should use synthetic engine oil that meets the same requirements given for conventional engine oil. When using synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same classification, viscosity, and grade shown in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine oil”. Also, you must follow the oil and filter change intervals shown in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity noted in Chapter 12 is the recommended engine oil for optimum engine performance. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

FAQ

What type of oil is recommended?

Use engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.

How often should I change the engine oil?

Follow the schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.”

What should I check regularly in the engine compartment?

Regularly inspect oil levels, coolant, and other fluids.

Are there specific steps to open the engine hood safely?

Be cautious to avoid injury and ensure the hood stay is properly inserted.

How do I check the engine oil level?

Park on a level surface, wait 5 minutes after turning off the engine, then check with the oil level gauge.

Can I use synthetic oil?

Yes, synthetic oil meeting the same requirements as conventional oil is recommended.

What factors increase engine oil consumption?

Factors include driving style, engine condition, and operating conditions like towing or heavy traffic.

How do I replace air cleaner elements?

This might involve removing clips and fender linings, as detailed in the maintenance guide.

What precautions should I take when working in the engine compartment?

Ensure the engine is cool and the vehicle is stationary, among other safety measures.

Is it safe to perform maintenance with the engine running?

Avoid performing maintenance with the engine running, especially around moving parts.

What should I do before servicing the engine compartment?

Stop the engine, apply the parking brake, and let the engine cool down.

Are there different maintenance recommendations for different countries?

Yes, refer to the specific “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” for your region.

How does improper maintenance affect the warranty?

Improper or incomplete service can cause unsafe operation and may void warranty coverage.

What should I be aware of when changing the engine oil?

Be careful not to spill oil, especially near the exhaust pipe.

Can I perform maintenance on the All-Wheel Drive system myself?

It’s recommended to have this done by an authorized Subaru dealer to avoid damage.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Maintenance Service Specification, Maintenance tips, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Maintenance Touring XT System Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Maintenance schedule Touring XT

The extensive maintenance system of the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT is intended to guarantee the longevity and optimum performance of the car. Important elements include routine maintenance on tires, oil, and filters as well as using extra care when handling pieces like the engine hood, clips, and engine parts. The “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet,” which contains the vehicle’s maintenance schedule, is customized for various models and geographical areas. To preserve safety and warranty coverage, Subaru highly advises that all maintenance be carried out by authorized dealers. Subaru also stresses the significance of adhering to particular safety regulations, particularly when doing repairs on the engine or All-Wheel Drive system.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Maintenance schedule

U.S. models
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. For details, read the separate “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”. For details, read the separate “Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canadian models
Some items of your vehicle are required to be serviced at scheduled intervals. For details about your maintenance schedule, read the separate “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Maintenance Precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiarize yourself with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and service for your SUBARU. Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your vehicle.
Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery acid.
Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent to do so. Serious personal injury may result in persons not experienced in servicing vehicles. Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well-maintained.
Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use safety stands to support the vehicle.
Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area, such as a garage or other closed areas.
Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.
Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.
Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water.
Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors apart, as that may activate the system or it can render it inoperative. NEVER use a circuit tester for these wiring. If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pre-tensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Check the inside of the engine compartment to see if there are any clothes and tools left. If they are left inside, they may be a cause of malfunction and fire.

NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of non-SUBARU-approved flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU-approved flushing systems use chemicals and/or solvents that have not been tested or approved by SUBARU.SUBARU warranties do not cover any part of the vehicle that is damaged by adding or applying chemicals and/or solvents other than those approved or recommended by SUBARU.

Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment

Always stop the engine and apply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from moving.
Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time after the engine is stopped.
Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, or any other fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when the engine is stopped. If your body or clothes come into contact with a rotating fan, that could result in serious injury. To avoid the risk of injury, perform the following precautions. Models with push button start system:
Always turn the push button ignition switch to the “OFF” position and confirm that the operation indicator on the switch is turned off. Then take the access key fob out from the vehicle.
Models without push-button start system:
Always remove the key from the ignition switch.
Before performing any servicing on a vehicle equipped with a remote engine start system temporarily place that system in the service mode to prevent it from unexpectedly starting the engine.

When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment

CAUTION

Do not contact the belt cover while checking the components in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause your hand to slip off the belt cover and result in an unexpected injury.
Do not touch the oil filter until the engine has cooled down completely. Doing so may result in a burn or other injury. Note that the oil filter becomes very hot when the engine is running and remains hot for some time after the engine has stopped.

When Checking or Servicing the Engine Compartment While the Engine Is Running
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair, and tools away from the cooling fan, belts, and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.

FAQ

What is the standard tire size for the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT?

The standard tire size is typically 225/50R18.

What type of tires does the Touring XT come equipped with?

The Touring XT usually comes with all-season tires designed for a balance of performance in various driving conditions.

Can I use winter tires on the Touring XT?

Yes, winter tires can be used for enhanced traction in snowy and icy conditions.

How often should tires be rotated on the Legacy Touring XT?

Tire rotation is recommended every 5,000 to 7,500 miles to ensure even wear.

What should the tire pressure be for the Touring XT?

The recommended tire pressure is usually around 32-35 psi, but always check the vehicle’s manual or the sticker on the driver’s side door jamb for specific recommendations.

Does the Touring XT have a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)?

Yes, it comes equipped with a TPMS to alert you when tire pressure is low.

How do I reset the TPMS on the Legacy Touring XT?

The TPMS can be reset via the vehicle’s settings menu or by driving the vehicle for a short distance after correcting the tire pressure.

Can I fit larger tires on the Touring XT?

Fitting larger tires is possible, but it’s important to ensure compatibility to avoid any handling or safety issues.

What is the load rating for tires on the Touring XT?

The load rating will depend on the specific tire model, but it’s designed to match the vehicle’s carrying capacity.

How do I check for tire wear on the Legacy Touring XT?

Check for wear using a tread depth gauge or the tread wear indicators located within the tire grooves.

What is the speed rating of the tires on the Touring XT?

The speed rating varies by tire brand and model, but they generally meet or exceed the vehicle’s top speed capabilities.

Are there recommended tire brands for the Touring XT?

Subaru may recommend specific brands, but any reputable tire that meets the size and performance specifications is suitable.

How can I improve tire longevity on my Touring XT?

Regular maintenance, keeping them properly inflated, and avoiding harsh driving habits can help extend tire life.

Is there a spare tire included with the Legacy Touring XT?

The Touring XT typically includes a compact spare tire, but it’s always good to verify with your specific model.

Can I use run-flat tires on the Legacy Touring XT?

Yes, run-flat tires can be used, but ensure they match the vehicle’s specifications for size and load.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Maintenance Schedule, Maintenance Service Specification, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Tire Information | Touring XT Quick Guide

Subaru Legacy 2023 Tire Information Touring XT

A smart tire system is included in the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT to improve the car’s performance and safety. All-season tires (225/50R18) come standard and provide a balanced performance in a range of driving conditions, guaranteeing stability and dependability. In order to improve safety and maintenance effectiveness, the car also has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that notifies drivers of any notable changes in tire pressure. There is a choice for drivers in colder regions to convert to winter tires, which offer better traction on snow and ice. Furthermore, the tire specifications of the Legacy Touring XT complement the car’s dynamic handling qualities, which make it appropriate for a variety of road conditions and provide a safe and enjoyable ride. This tire configuration is indicative of Subaru’s dedication to producing cars that are trustworthy and adaptable.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tire information

Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number, or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These markings can provide you with useful information on the tire.

Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with a P-Metric tire size. It is important to understand the sizing system in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.

P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section Width is measured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section Height divided by Section Width) helps provide more dimensional information about the tire size.

Example:

Certain tire type used on light-duty vehicles such as passenger cars
Section Width in millimeters
Aspect Ratio (= section height 7 section width).
R = Radial Construction
Rim diameter in inches Load and Speed Rating Descriptions
The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the size designation. They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tire’s speed rating.
Example
Load Index: A numerical code that specifies the maximum load a tire can carry at indicated by its speed symbol, at maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs (600 kg), and “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 kg).
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load-rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire’s rated load.
Speed Rating: An alphabetical system describing a tire’s capability to travel at established and predetermined speeds. For example, “V” means 149 mph (240 km/h)

WARNING

Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a speed-rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be operated at the tire’s rated speed.
The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered from their original condition. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment tire-designed loads and speeds.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the intended outboard sidewall. Here is a brief review of the TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.

DOT symbol
Manufacturer’s Identification Mark
Tire Size Code
Tire Type Code
Date of Manufacture The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.
The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

DOT symbol
Plant Code
Manufacturer’s Code
Date of Manufacture The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.
The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Other markings
The following makings are also placed on the sidewall. Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, “300 kPa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum permissible weight load for this tire. For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg (1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING
Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load-rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire’s rated load.

Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire. For example, “TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL

Construction
The generic name of each cord material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDEWALL 2 POLYESTER”. Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number, or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These markings can provide you with useful information on the tire. Your vehicle comes equipped with a P-Metric tire size. It is important to understand the sizing system in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.

FAQ

What is the standard tire size for the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT?

The standard tire size is typically 225/50R18.

What type of tires does the Touring XT come equipped with?

The Touring XT usually comes with all-season tires designed for a balance of performance in various driving conditions.

Can I use winter tires on the Touring XT?

Yes, winter tires can be used for enhanced traction in snowy and icy conditions.

How often should tires be rotated on the Legacy Touring XT?

Tire rotation is recommended every 5,000 to 7,500 miles to ensure even wear.

What should the tire pressure be for the Touring XT?

The recommended tire pressure is usually around 32-35 psi, but always check the vehicle’s manual or the sticker on the driver’s side door jamb for specific recommendations.

Does the Touring XT have a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)?

Yes, it comes equipped with a TPMS to alert you when tire pressure is low.

How do I reset the TPMS on the Legacy Touring XT?

The TPMS can be reset via the vehicle’s settings menu or by driving the vehicle for a short distance after correcting the tire pressure.

Can I fit larger tires on the Touring XT?

Fitting larger tires is possible, but it’s important to ensure compatibility to avoid any handling or safety issues.

What is the load rating for tires on the Touring XT?

The load rating will depend on the specific tire model, but it’s designed to match the vehicle’s carrying capacity.

How do I check for tire wear on the Legacy Touring XT?

Check for wear using a tread depth gauge or the tread wear indicators located within the tire grooves.

What is the speed rating of the tires on the Touring XT?

The speed rating varies by tire brand and model, but they generally meet or exceed the vehicle’s top speed capabilities.

Are there recommended tire brands for the Touring XT?

Subaru may recommend specific brands, but any reputable tire that meets the size and performance specifications is suitable.

How can I improve tire longevity on my Touring XT?

Regular maintenance, keeping them properly inflated, and avoiding harsh driving habits can help extend tire life.

Is there a spare tire included with the Legacy Touring XT?

The Touring XT typically includes a compact spare tire, but it’s always good to verify with your specific model.

Can I use run-flat tires on the Legacy Touring XT?

Yes, run-flat tires can be used, but ensure they match the vehicle’s specifications for size and load.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.htm

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Consumer Information Reporting Safety Defects, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, Tire Information, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Battery and Specifications Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Replacing key battery

The battery system of the 2023 Subaru Legacy is strong and dependable, built to withstand the strain of its advanced electrical components and guarantee steady operation. This system usually runs on a 12-volt lead-acid battery, which is designed to support the advanced features of the car, such as the start-stop system that some models include. Under the hood, the battery is positioned for convenience of access and maintenance. It is distinguished by features including a high cold cranking amps (CCA) rating, which guarantees consistent starting power regardless of the weather. Furthermore, the battery is intended to last three to five years, though this might change depending on a number of variables, including driving style and temperature. The battery system of the Legacy plays a crucial role in providing the car with its well-known dependability and functionality, which makes it an essential part of the whole driving experience.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Replacing key battery

The access key fob/transmitter battery may be discharged under the following conditions.

The operation of the keyless access function is unstable.
The operating distance of the remote keyless entry system is unstable.
The transmitter does not operate properly when used within the standard distance.

Replace the battery with a new one.

CAUTION

Do not let dust, oil, or water get on or in the access key fob/transmitter when replacing the battery.
Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.
Be careful not to touch or damage the printed circuit board in the access key fob/transmitter when replacing the battery.
Be careful not to allow children to touch the battery and any removed parts; children could swallow them.
There is a danger of an explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery.
Batteries should not be exposed to excessive heat such as bright sunlight, fire, or the like.

NOTE

Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
Mount the battery in the correct orientation to prevent fluid leakage. Be careful not to bend the terminals. It may result in a malfunction.
It is recommended that the battery be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
Use a new battery.
After replacing the battery, confirm that the transmitter functions properly.

Replacing the battery of the access key fob

When removing or reinstalling the access key fob cover, make sure that the plastic part does not come off or become misaligned.
Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 or equivalent

Release button
Emergency key
Take out the emergency key.
Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to remove the cover

Take out the emergency key.
Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to remove the cover.
Take out the battery using a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
Insert a new battery with its positive (+) side facing upward as shown in the figure.
Attach the cover to the access key fob by fitting the projections and recesses together.

Replacing transmitter battery
Battery: Button battery CR1620 or equivalent

Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a flat-head screwdriver.
Remove the transmitter case from the key head.
Open the transmitter case by releasing the hooks.
1. Negative (−) side facing up
Replace the old battery with a new battery making sure to install the new battery with the negative (−) side facing up.
Put together the transmitter case by fitting the hooks on the case.
Reinstall the transmitter case in the key head.
Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchronized with the remote keyless entry system’s control unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button six times to synchronize the unit.

Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dimensions

Item		Legacy		Outback		Subaru Outback Wilderness
		2.5 L	2.4 L	2.5 L	2.4 L
Drive system		AWD
Transmission type		CVT
Overall length		191.1 (4,855)		191.9 (4,875)		191.3 (4,860)
Overall width		72.4 (1,840)		74.2 (1,885)		74.6 (1,895)
Overall height		59.1 (1,500)		66.1 (1,680)		66.9 (1,700)
Wheelbase		108.3 (2,750)		108.1 (2,745)
Tread	Front	62.2 (1,580)		61.8 (1,570)		62.0 (1,575)
	Rear	63.4 (1,610)		62.8 (1,595)		63.0 (1,600)
Ground clearance*1		5.9 (150)		8.7 (220)		9.5 (241)

Measured with vehicle empty
CVT: Continuously variable transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive

Engine

Engine model	FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)	FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type	Horizontally opposed, liquid-cooled 4-cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine	Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc)	152 (2,498)	146 (2,387)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm)	3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)	3.70 6 3.39 (94.0 6 86.0)
Compression ratio	12.0: 1	10.6: 1
Firing order	1 – 3 – 2 – 4	1 – 3 – 2 – 4

Fuel

Fuel requirement	Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher	18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)

NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly trained expert. It is recommended that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

Approved engine oil
Always use SUBARU-approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer. If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described in the following.

Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU-approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Instils (International Lubricanttute) classification SN with the Specification Advisory Commit-words “RESOURCECONSER-tee) GF-5 or GF-6A, which can VING”, SN PLUS with the words be identified with the ILSAC “RESOURCE CONSERVING” or certification mark (Starburst SP with the words “RESOURCE mark) CONSERVING”

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil for optimum engine performance and protection. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available, 5W-30 conventional oil may be used if you need to add oil. However, you should change to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the next oil change.

2.5 L models

– Adding the oil from low level to full level:

1.1 US q t (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp q t)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:

4.4 US q t (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)

2.4 L models

– Adding the oil from L to F level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp q t)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:

4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp q t)

Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil

Oil	Front differential gear oil		Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade	● SUBARU Extra MT3 ● API classification GL-5 (75W-90)4		2.5 L models and 2.4 L for Outback: API classification GL-5 (75W-90)3 2.4 L for Legacy/Subaru Outback Wilderness: SUBARU Extra MT3 or API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*4
Oil capacity*1	2.5 L models	1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)	0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
	2.4 L models	1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
Remarks*2

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of differential gear oil.
You may use this type of differential gear oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from fuel efficiency.

Fluids

Fluid

Fluid type*1

Fluid capacity*2

Remarks*3

Continuously variable transmission fluid

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

2.5 L models:

· Legacy: 11.9 US qt (11.3 liters, 9.9 Imp qt)

· Outback: 12.4 US qt (11.7 liters, 10.3 Imp qt)

2.4 L models:

· Legacy: 12.3 US qt (11.6 liters, 10.2 Imp qt)

· Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness:

12.6 US qt (11.9 liters, 10.5 Imp qt)

Brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

—

Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.
For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

Engine Coolant

Vehicle Model	Coolant capacity	Coolant type
2.5 L models	9.5 US q t (9.0 liters, 7.9 Imp q t)	SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
2.4 L models	9.2 US q t (8.7 liters, 7.7 Imp q t)	SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.

Electrical System

Battery type		LN2
Alternator		2.5 L models: 12 V-150 A 2.4 L models: 12 V-190 A
Spark plugs	2.5 L models	DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)
	2.4 L models	SILKFR8A6 (NGK)

Tires

Item		Legacy			Outback		Subaru Outback Wilderness
Tire size		225/55R17 97V	225/50R18 95V		225/65R17 102H	225/60R18 100H	225/65R17 102T
Wheel size		17 6 7J 17 6 7 1/2J	18 6 7 1/2J		17 6 7J	18 6 7J	17 6 7J
Pressure	Front	33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kef/cm2)	33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kef/cm2)*4	36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kef/cm2)*4	35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
	Rear	32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kef/cm2)	32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kef/cm2)*4	35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kef/cm2)*4	33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Temporary spare tire/Conventional tire	Size	T155/70 D17 110M			T155/80 D17 101M2 225/60 R18 100H3		225/65 R17 102T*3
	Pressure	60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kef/cm2)			60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 keg/cm2)2 Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kef/cm2)3 Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 keg/cm2)*3
Wheel nut tightening torque		88.5 lbf·ft (120 NM, 12.2 kgf·m)*1

This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 l bf (40 to 50 kg f) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible?
Models with temporary spare tire
Models with conventional tire
See the tire inflation pressure label located on the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Brake Pedal

Pedal clearance	2.68 (68)*
Pedal free play	0.02 – 0.07 (0.4 – 1.8)

Brake Disc
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

Brake Pad

Brake pad wear limit

WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing the bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire.

Bulb Chart
Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

Front turn signal lights Front position lights (Legacy/Outback)
Vanity mirror lights
Doorstep lights (if equipped)
Rear side marker lights (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
Backup lights
Rear turn signal lights
Trunk light (Legacy)
Front position lights (Subaru Outback Wilderness)
Map lights
Dome light
Low and high beam headlights Daytime running lights (Legacy/Outback)
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Accessory lights (Legacy/Outback)
Front-side marker lights
Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
High-mounted stop light
Cargo area light (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
Tail lights (if equipped)
License plate lights
Rear gate light (if equipped)
Tail and stoplights
Rear side marker lights (Legacy)

Vehicle Identification

Emission control label
Certification and barcode label
Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle placard)
Vehicle identification number
Model number label
Fuel label
Air conditioner label

Function Settings

Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the Center Information Display to meet your personal requirements.

Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item	Function	Available settings	Factory default setting
Alarm system	Alarm system	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Remote keyless entry system	Audible signal	Operation/Non-operation	Operation

Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer

Item	Function	Available settings	Factory default setting
Alarm system	Monitoring start delay time (after closing doors)	0 seconds/30 seconds	30 seconds
Alarm system	Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light illumination (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)	ON/OFF	OFF
Keyless access with push-button	Audible signal volume*2	Levels 1 to 7	Level 5
Keyless access with push-button	Trunk open without key (Legacy)	ON/OFF	ON
Remote keyless entry system	Audible signal volume*2	Level 1 to 7	Level 5
Remote trunk open/power rear gate open function*1	Operation of trunk opening/power rear gate opening by remote transmitter/ace cess key fob	Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing and holding	Pressing and holding
Key lock-in prevention	Key lock-in prevention	Operation/Non-operation	Operation

Item	Function	Available settings	Factory default setting
Battery drainage prevention function	Battery drainage prevention function	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Auto dimmer cancel	The sensitivity of the operation of the auto dimmer cancel	OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max	Mid
High beam assist function*1	High beam assist function	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper*1	Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation	Operation/Non-operation	U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation Other models: Operation

If Equipped
The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.

FAQ

What type of battery does the 2023 Subaru Legacy use?

The 2023 Legacy typically uses a 12-volt lead-acid battery, designed for modern vehicles’ electrical requirements.

Where is the battery located in the 2023 Legacy?

The battery is usually located under the hood, often on the driver’s side for easy access.

What is the average lifespan of the Legacy’s battery?

The battery in the Legacy typically lasts between 3 to 5 years, depending on usage and maintenance.

How can I tell if my Legacy’s battery needs replacement?

Signs include slow engine cranking, dim lights, or the battery warning light on the dashboard.

What are the specifications for a replacement battery in the Legacy?

The replacement battery should match the original’s specifications, like voltage, physical size, and terminal type.

Does the Legacy require a special type of battery for its start-stop system?

Models with a start-stop system may require an AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) battery, which is designed for frequent start-stops.

Can I replace the Legacy’s battery myself?

Yes, it’s possible to replace the battery yourself, but it’s important to follow safety procedures and ensure correct installation.

Are there any maintenance tips for extending the life of the Legacy’s battery?

Regular checks, keeping terminals clean, and ensuring the battery is securely fastened can extend its life.

Is the battery covered under the Subaru Legacy’s warranty?

The battery may be covered under warranty, depending on the terms and the battery’s condition.

How does extreme weather affect the Legacy’s battery?

Extreme cold or hot temperatures can affect battery performance and lifespan, often requiring more frequent replacements in harsh climates.

What is the cold cranking amps (CCA) rating for the Legacy’s battery?

The CCA rating varies; however, it’s typically around 600-700 CCA for a vehicle like the Legacy.

Can I use a higher-capacity battery in my Legacy?

Using a higher-capacity battery is possible as long as it fits the car’s specifications and physical dimensions.

Are there any signs of a failing battery while driving?

A failing battery may cause electrical issues like flickering lights or electronic accessories malfunctioning.

Does the Subaru Legacy have a battery warning system?

Yes, the Legacy is equipped with a battery warning light that indicates when there’s a battery or charging system issue.

How often should the Legacy’s battery be tested?

It’s advisable to test the battery at least once a year, especially before winter.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Maintenance Service Specification, Owner Manual, Replacing key battery, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Fuses System Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Fuses Touring XT

A vital part of the 2023 Subaru Legacy’s electrical system, the fuse system is intended to shield the circuits from harm caused by overcurrent or short circuit situations. This system consists of several blade-style fuses, each of which is in charge of protecting a certain electrical component, like the power windows, audio system, and lighting. These fuses are usually found in conveniently accessible fuse boxes in the engine compartment and beneath the dashboard. Their amperage varies to meet the needs of various circuits. Because of the system’s simple design, owners may easily replace or repair it and maintain the electrical integrity of their car with little difficulty. This configuration guarantees the safety and proper operation of the car’s numerous electrical features in addition to improving the vehicle’s dependability.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Fuses

CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result.

NOTE
Fuse rating and using circuit are described on each behind the fuse box cover. The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

Spare fuses
Fuse puller

The other one (main fuse box) is housed in the engine compartment. Also, the spare fuses and fuse puller are stored in the fuse box cover.
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller when removing it from the main fuse box.

If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it.

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ “OFF” position and turn off all electrical accessories.
Remove the fuse box cover.
Determine which fuse may be blown. Look at the back side of each fuse box cover.
Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the same rating.
If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Installation of Accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle. We recommend that you install only genuine SUBARU accessories on your vehicle.

Replacing Bulbs
Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is the risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire.

Headlights

The LED headlight warning light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Front Turn Signal Light/Front Position Light

Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it out.
Pull out the bulb from the socket and replace the bulb with a new one.

Rear Combination Lights

NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We recommend that you have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Undo the clips.
Remove the side cover.
Remove the upper and lower screws.
Slide the rear combination light assembly straight rearward and remove it from the vehicle.
Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and replace it with a new one.
Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.
Reinstall the rear combination light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part of the combination light assembly securely to each holder of the vehicle side.
Tighten the upper and lower screws.
Reinstall the side cover.

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

Undo the clips.
Remove the side cover.
Remove the upper and lower screws.
Slide the rear combination light assembly straight rearward and remove it from the vehicle
1. Rear turn signal light
2. Rear side marker light
Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and replace it with a new one.
Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.
Reinstall the rear combination light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part of the combination light assembly securely to each holder of the vehicle side.
Tighten the upper and lower screws.
Reinstall the side cover.

Legacy

NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We recommend that you have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Open the trunk.
Remove the trunk trim lining by removing the clips indicated in the illustration.
Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it.
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one.
Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise.
Reconnect the electrical connector.
Reinstall the trunk trim lining.

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the light cover or rear gate light (if equipped) as shown in the illustration, and pry the light cover off from the rear gate trim.
Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it.
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one.
Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise.
Install the light cover on the rear gate.

Door Step Light
Replacing the bulb could cause a short circuit. Has the bulb been replaced by your SUBARU dealer?

Trunk Light (Legacy)
Replacing the bulb could cause burns since the bulb may be very hot. Has the bulb been replaced by your SUBARU dealer?

Other Bulbs
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We recommend that you have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Adjusting Headlight Aim (Legacy/Outback)

Adjustment screw A
Adjustment screw B

Before checking the headlight aiming

Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area around the headlight is not deformed.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Sit in the driver’s seat.
Bounce the vehicle several times.

Headlight aim adjustment

Adjustment direction mark

Turn screw A clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust it. Remember the direction of the rotation and the number of rotations.
1. Adjustment direction mark
Turn screw B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1.

NOTE

If the headlight aim cannot be adjusted, contact your SUBARU dealer.
To inspect the headlight aim position, consult a SUBARU dealer.

FAQ

What type of fuses does the 2023 Subaru Legacy use?

The 2023 Legacy typically uses blade-style fuses that are common in modern vehicles.

Where is the fuse box located in the 2023 Subaru Legacy?

The primary fuse box is usually located under the dashboard on the driver’s side, with a possible secondary box in the engine compartment.

How can I identify a blown fuse in my Legacy?

A blown fuse will typically have a broken wire or a discolored window in the top of the fuse.

Are the fuse diagrams available inside the vehicle?

Yes, fuse diagrams are usually located on the fuse box covers or in the vehicle’s owner’s manual.

Can I replace a Legacy fuse by myself?

Yes, fuses can be replaced easily, but it’s important to use the correct amperage fuse as a replacement.

What should I do if a new fuse blows soon after replacement?

If a new fuse blows quickly, it might indicate an electrical problem; it’s advisable to seek professional assistance.

How many fuse boxes does the 2023 Legacy have?

The 2023 Legacy typically has two fuse boxes – one inside the cabin and another under the hood.

Is there a special tool needed to replace fuses in the Legacy?

No special tool is needed, but a fuse puller or a pair of needle-nose pliers can be helpful.

Can I use any brand of fuses for my Legacy?

As long as the replacement fuses match the required specifications, any reputable brand can be used.

What is the amperage range of fuses used in the Legacy?

The Legacy uses a range of fuses, typically from 5 to 30 amps, depending on the circuit.

Do I need to disconnect the battery before changing the fuse?

It’s a safe practice to disconnect the battery, but for simple fuse changes, it’s often not necessary.

Are there any spare fuses provided in the Legacy?

Many vehicles come with spare fuses; check the fuse box or the owner’s manual to confirm.

How can I tell if a fuse is for a high or low current circuit?

The amperage rating of the fuse indicates the current level it’s designed for; higher amperage fuses are for higher current circuits.

What common issues are solved by replacing a fuse in the Legacy?

Replacing a fuse can resolve issues like non-functional lights, radios, or power windows.

Are the fuses in the Legacy different from other Subaru models?

Fuses across Subaru models are quite similar but always refer to the specific model’s manual for exact details.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Fuses, Legacy 2023, Maintenance Service Specification, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Wheel Replacement Touring XT Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Wheel Replacement Touring XT

Notable among Subaru’s lineup additions, the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT brings a number of improvements, chief among them being the ability to replace its wheels. This model, which is renowned for striking a mix between comfort and performance, now comes with an improved wheel system that improves driving dynamics and aesthetic appeal. The redesigned wheels offer improved handling, grip, and stability overall and are designed to work in harmony with the Legacy’s all-wheel-drive capabilities. These improvements make the Legacy Touring XT a more alluring option for customers looking for a balance between style and substance. They also highlight the vehicle’s clean and sophisticated design, making for a more engaging driving experience.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING
Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifications could interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
Align the valve with the valve hole in the cover, then fit the cover on the wheel by tapping your hand evenly around the circumference of the cover.

Alloy wheels (if equipped)
Alloy wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.

When any of the wheels are removed and replaced for a tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.
Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surfaces of the wheel.
Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap is replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for alloy wheels.

Windshield washer fluid

Windshield washer fluid warning light

When there is only a small amount of washer fluid remaining, the windshield washer fluid warning light will illuminate. When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as follows.

“FULL” mark

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark on the tank. Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean water. In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield washer fluid.

CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause paint damage. If you fill the windshield washer tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the windshield washer tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the windshield washer tank.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades or washer system.

Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield and rear window using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, however, use detergent to clean the blade rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth (and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner) when you clean the blade rubbers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade strongly, the black coating component will peel off, which will cause the wiper to judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that the rubber has not come loose. After cleaning the window glass and wiper blade rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean water. Rinse the window until the water does not form beads on the glass. This indicates that the glass is clean.

CAUTION

Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.
When you wish to raise the passenger-side wiper arm, first raise the driver-side wiper arm. Otherwise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each other, possibly resulting in scratches.
Return the passenger-side wiper arm to its original position before returning the driver-side wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each other, possibly resulting in scratches.
When returning the raised wipers to their original positions, return the wipers slowly on the windshield by hand. Returning the wipers from the detached positions by the spring operation might change the shape of the wiper arm or scratch the windshield.
While removing the wiper blades from the wiper arms, do not return the wiper arms to their original positions. Otherwise, the windshield surface may be scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this method, replace the wiper blades using the following procedures.

Windshield wiper blade assembly

Raise the wiper arm off the windshield. First, raise the driver’s side wiper arm and then raise the front passenger’s side wiper arm.CAUTION
Hold the wiper arm when replacing the wiper blade. Holding the wiper blade may result in blade deformation.
Lock knob
Hold the wiper blade connection by hand, push the lock knob to release the lock, and then pull out the wiper blade assembly.
NOTE
Do not use a hard object to push the lock knob. The lock knob may be scratched.
When installing the wiper blade assembly, align it with the wiper arm connection part and then slide it in the opposite direction of removal to install. After installing the wiper blade assembly, check that the connection part is locked completely.
Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

NOTE
Do not use a hard object to push the lock knob. The lock knob may be scratched.

Windshield wiper blade rubber

Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.

Slit

Pull the wiper blade rubber from the right side in the order of (1), (2), and (3) until the slit on the wiper blade can be seen position.
Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber through the slit to remove it.3. Insert a new wiper blade rubber into the slit. Do not insert the wiper blade rubber into the wrong slit.
Insert a new wiper blade rubber into the slit. Do not insert the wiper blade rubber into the wrong slit.

NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper blade rubber replacement. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer for wiper blade rubber replacement if necessary.

Rear window wiper blade assembly (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.
Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.
Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm.
Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.
Attach the wiper blade.

NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper blade rubber replacement. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer for wiper blade rubber replacement if necessary.

Rear window wiper blade assembly

Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.
Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.
Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm.
Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

Rear window wiper blade rubber (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly to unlock it from the plastic support.
Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic support.
Metal spines
If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.
Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber assembly, then slide the blade rubber assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper may scratch the rear window glass.
Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

Battery

Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas that is highly flammable and explosive.
For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery.
Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the
eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately.
To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry
Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because it will shorten battery life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water.

FAQ

What wheel size is standard on the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT?

The 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT typically comes with 18-inch wheels as standard.

Are there different wheel design options available for the Touring XT?

Yes, Subaru offers a variety of wheel designs for the Touring XT to suit different tastes and styles.

Can I fit larger wheels than the standard size on the Legacy Touring XT?

Yes, larger wheels can be fitted, but it’s important to ensure they are compatible with the car’s specifications to avoid any handling or safety issues.

Does changing the wheel size affect the vehicle’s warranty?

Altering the wheel size can potentially affect the warranty if it leads to damage or affects the vehicle’s performance. It’s best to consult with a Subaru dealer.

Are the wheels on the Touring XT model different from other Legacy models?

Yes, the Touring XT often has unique wheel designs or finishes that distinguish it from other models in the Legacy lineup.

What type of tires comes with the 2023 Legacy Touring XT’s wheels?

The Legacy Touring XT typically comes with all-season tires that provide a good balance of performance in various weather conditions.

Is it possible to get run-flat tires for the Legacy Touring XT?

While Subaru doesn’t typically equip the Legacy with run-flat tires, they can be purchased separately and installed.

Can I use winter tires on the 2023 Legacy Touring XT’s standard wheels?

Yes, you can fit winter tires on the standard wheels for improved traction in snowy or icy conditions.

Are there any color options for the wheels on the Touring XT?

The Touring XT usually comes with standard wheel colors, but custom paint jobs can be done through aftermarket services.

How does wheel size affect the Legacy Touring XT’s fuel efficiency?

Larger wheels can sometimes reduce fuel efficiency slightly due to increased rolling resistance and weight.

Is wheel alignment checked during regular maintenance for the Legacy Touring XT?

Yes, wheel alignment is typically checked during regular maintenance intervals to ensure optimal handling and tire wear.

What is the bolt pattern for the 2023 Legacy Touring XT’s wheels?

The bolt pattern for the Legacy Touring XT’s wheels is usually 5×114.3 mm.

Can I install aftermarket wheels on the 2023 Legacy Touring XT?

Yes, aftermarket wheels can be installed, but it’s important to choose wheels that meet the vehicle’s specifications.

How do I know when to replace the wheels on my Legacy Touring XT?

Wheels should be replaced if they are damaged, or corroded, or if you’re experiencing ride quality issues.

Are there performance benefits to upgrading wheels on the Touring XT?

Upgrading to lighter or better-designed wheels can enhance performance, and handling, and potentially improve fuel economy.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Maintenance Service Specification, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual, Wheel Replacement

Legacy Subaru

Subaru Legacy 2023 Tires and wheels Touring XT User Guide

Subaru Legacy 2023 Tires and wheels Touring XT

The tire and wheel system for the 2023 Subaru Legacy is made to blend comfort, safety, and performance. It provides choices for summer, winter, and all-season tires, each appropriate for various driving circumstances. Since tire pressure can fluctuate with temperature changes, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is essential for warning drivers of major dips in tire pressure. To keep your tires performing at their best, inspect them frequently for wear, damage, and proper pressure. To stop vibrations and uneven wear, wheel alignment, and balance are essential. The handling, safety, and mechanical integrity of the car can all be negatively impacted by improper tire maintenance, so it’s crucial to adhere to certain criteria when it comes to tire rotation and replacement to make sure the tires match in terms of brand, size, and wear.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tires and wheels

Types of tires
You should be familiar with the type of tires present on your vehicle.

All season tires
All-season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling, and braking performance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road conditions. However, all-season tires do not offer as much traction performance as winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads. All season tires are identified by “ALL SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.

Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited for highway driving under dry conditions. Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads. If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires. When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-covered and icy roads. However, winter tires do not perform as well as summer tires and all-season tires on roads other than snow-covered and icy roads.

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) U.S.-Spec. Models) s11av02 The tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object). If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm garage and then drive the vehicle in cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire pressures may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. To avoid this problem when adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pressures higher than those shown on the tire inflation pressure label. Specifically, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kg f/cm2) for every difference of 108F (5.68C) between the temperature in the garage and the temperature outside. By way of example, the following table shows the required tire pressures that correspond to various outside temperatures when the temperature in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Example:
Tire size: P205/55R16 89V, 205/50R17 89V and P225/40R18 88V

Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 k gf/cm2) Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kg f/cm2)

Garage temperature:608F (15.68C)

Outside temperature	Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kg/cm2)]
Outside temperature	Front	Rear
308F (−18C)	36 (250, 2.5)	35 (240, 2.4)
108F (−128C)	38 (265, 2.65)	37 (255, 2.55)
−108F (−238C)	41 (280, 2.8)	39 (270, 2.7)

Example:
Tire size: 225/65R17 102H, 225/60R18 100H, 225/65R17 102T

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kg/cm2)

Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kg/cm2)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside temperature	Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kg/cm2)]
Outside temperature	Front	Rear
308F (−18C)	38 (260, 2.65)	36 (250, 2.5)
108F (−128C)	40 (275, 2.8)	38 (265, 2.65)
−108F (−238C)	42 (290, 2.95)	41 (280, 2.8)

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates when you drive the vehicle in cold outside air after adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tire pressures using the method described above. Then, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to see that the low tire pressure warning light turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire pressure warning light does not turn off, the tire pressure monitoring system may not be functioning normally. In this event, go to a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected as soon as possible. While the vehicle is driven, friction between the tires and the road surface causes the tires to warm up. After illumination of the low tire pressure warning light, any increase in the tire pressure caused by an increase in the outside air temperature or by an increase in the temperature in the tires can cause the low tire pressure warning light to turn off. It may not be possible to install TPMS valves on certain wheels that are on the market. Therefore, if you change the wheels (for example, a switch to snow tires), use wheels that have the same part number as the standard equipment wheels. Without four operational TPMS valves/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS will not fully function and the warning light on the combination meter will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute.

WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned on or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Slowly pull off the road to a safe place. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

TPMS valve self-registration
When the wheels are replaced (such as when installing snow tires) or when a new TPMS valve is mounted on a newly installed wheel, you will need to perform TPMS valve self-registration. Refer to the following procedure to perform TPMS valve self-registration.

Install the wheels with TPMS valves on the vehicle.
Adjust the tire pressure to the specified value. For information about the specified value of the tire pressure, refer to “Tires”
Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or until the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

NOTE

When installing TPMS valves, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
Registration of TPMS valves can also be done at a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer. also, be done at a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer.

Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.

NOTE

When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, potholes, or other rough surfaces. If doing so is unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed down to a walking pace or less, and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the vehicle.

If you feel unusual vibrations while driving or find it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires’ service lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire and the spare (if equipped) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Tire inflation pressure label
Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the door pillar on the driver’s side. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressure. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kg/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure. Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnormally.

Correctly inflated tires (tread worn evenly)

Road holding is good, and steering is responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also lower.

Underinflated tires (tread worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.

Overinflated tires (tread worn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the effects of road surface bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.

WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly balanced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also, have them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment causes the tires to wear on one side and reduces the vehicle’s running stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear.

NOTE
The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering performance.

Wear indicators

New tread
Worn tread
Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.

NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible.

The rotational direction of tires

Example of rotational direction marked on the sidewall

Front
If the tire has a specific rotational direction, refer to the arrow marked on the sidewall. The arrow should be pointing forward when the wheels are fitted.

Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 nonunidirectional tires

Front

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

Front

Models with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires

Front
Prior to carrying out a tire rotation, check the side wall of the tires and confirm the following.

All 5 tires are the same in brand and tread pattern.
The rotational directions and sizes match.

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened. After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose.

Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and were selected to give the best possible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construction matching those shown on the tire inflation pressure label and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on the tire inflation pressure label. Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride comfort, braking performance, speedometer accuracy, and odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicle’s ground clearance. All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment. For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends replacing all four tires at the same time.

WARNING
When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.

Size
Speed Symbol
Load Index
Circumference
Construction
Manufacturer
Brand (tread pattern)
Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the driver’s door pillar. If all four tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the following.

Ride
Handling
Braking
Speedometer/Odometer calibration
Clearance between the body and tires It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.
Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in an accident.

FAQ

What types of tires are available for the Subaru Legacy?

All-season, summer, and winter (snow) tires.

What is the function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)?

It warns the driver when tire pressure is severely low.

How does temperature affect tire pressure?

Tire pressures drop in cold temperatures. Inflate tires higher than the label suggests in warm garages before driving in colder outside air.

How often should I check the tires for damage or abnormal wear?

Daily check for serious damage, nails, stones, and abnormal wear.

How often should tire pressures be checked?

At least once a month and before long journeys.

When should tire pressures be checked?

When the tires are cold, before driving the vehicle.

What causes wheel imbalance and its effects?

Tires wear during use, causing wheel imbalance, which can lead to vibrations and affect the vehicle’s stability and tire wear.

What are tire tread wear indicators?

They become visible when the tread depth decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm), indicating tire replacement is needed.

How should tires be rotated on the Subaru Legacy?

Rotate tires according to the vehicle’s tire rotation pattern, considering tire brand, tread pattern, and size. Adjust tire pressures and retighten wheel nuts after rotation.

What should be considered when replacing tires?

Ensure tires match the size, construction, speed symbol, load index, and other specifications on the tire inflation pressure label.

Is it safe to mix different types of tires?

No, mixing different types of tires can reduce vehicle controllability and safety.

Can I use tires of non-specified sizes?

Using non-specified sizes can detract from controllability, and ride comfort, and affect the vehicle’s speedometer and odometer accuracy.

Should all four tires be the same?

Yes, all four tires should be identical in terms of size, brand, construction, and wear degree for safe operation.

What happens if tires are not replaced as recommended?

Incorrect tire replacement can lead to mechanical damage, affect the ride, handling, and braking, and potentially cause accidents.

How does tire wear affect vehicle performance?

Abnormal tire wear can lead to reduced vehicle stability, handling issues, and increased risk of accidents.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Maintenance Service Specification, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, Tires wheels, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Brake fluid Touring XT System

Subaru Legacy 2023 Brake fluid Touring XT

For maximum performance and safety, the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT’s brake fluid system is a crucial part that needs to be maintained on a regular basis. This entails monitoring the fluid level every month, handling the fluid with caution to avoid spills and contamination, and adding or changing it according to predetermined parameters. It is important not to combine different brands or types of brake fluid; DOT-4 is the preferred type. In addition, the system should be routinely evaluated as part of the car’s maintenance plan. To ensure efficient braking and avoid performance loss due to moisture, the brake fluid should be changed every 30,000 miles.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Brake fluid

Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

The alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.

Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If brake fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

Visually check the brake fluid level of the reservoir monthly on an even surface.

CAUTION

When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir. Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If brake fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

“MAX” level line
“MIN” level line A)
The brake fluid level must be checked in this area. Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level for the brake system at the shaded area in the illustration. For MT models, this reservoir is used for both the brake and clutch systems and has chambers for each system. If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.

Recommended brake fluid
Never use different brands of brake fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if they are the same brand.

Checking the fluid level
Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes because clutch fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.

CAUTION

The clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause improper clutch operation.
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.
When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank.
Never splash the clutch fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts. The alcohol contained in the clutch fluid may damage them. . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid when adding it. If clutch fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
The fluid level for the clutch system must be checked at the inboard side of the reservoir. It cannot be checked at the outboard side of the reservoir.

“MAX” level line
“MIN” level line

Be sure to check the brake fluid level from the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to “MAX”. Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.

CAUTION
Never use different brands of clutch fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if they are the same brand.

Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replacement of Brake Pad

If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly brake rotor repair or replacement.
It is recommended that you disconnect the vehicle battery before replacing the brake pad. However, it is dangerous to disconnect the vehicle battery. We recommend that you have your SUBARU dealer replace the brake pad.

The disc brakes have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied. If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

FAQ

How often should I wash my Subaru Legacy?

Wash the vehicle at least once a month to prevent contamination from road grime.

Can I wash the Legacy with hot water?

Use lukewarm or cold water, not hot water, and avoid washing in direct sunlight.

What kind of detergent should I use for tough stains like bird droppings or tree sap?

Use a light, neutral detergent for removing tough stains.

How should I wash the underbody of the Legacy?

Thoroughly flush the underbody with lukewarm or cold water, especially after driving off-road or on muddy/sandy roads.

Is there any special consideration for washing the brakes?

When washing the vehicle, be aware that the brakes may get wet, which can lengthen the stopping distance. To dry them, drive at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal.

Should I wax my Subaru Legacy? How often?

Yes, wax the vehicle after washing and drying. Apply wax at least once a month or when the surface no longer repels water.

Can I wax the windshield washer nozzles and rearview camera?

Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles or apply wax on the rearview camera.

What should I do if I get wax on the rearview camera?

If wax contacts the camera, remove it with a cloth moistened with diluted neutral detergent.

How do I clean the wheels of my Legacy?

Use a neutral cleaning agent and rinse thoroughly with water. Avoid using soap-containing grit or high-speed washing devices.

Can I wash the engine compartment?

Avoid washing the engine compartment as water can cause engine trouble or malfunction of electrical equipment.

What should I avoid using when washing the bulb assembly cover?

Do not use organic solvents. If used, rinse off completely with water.

How do I care for matte-painted wheels?

For vehicles without matte-painted wheels, promptly clean off grime and avoid using soap-containing grit.

What are common causes of corrosion on the Legacy?

Accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris, damage to paint and protective coatings from gravel and stone chips, and exposure to road salt, dust control chemicals, or salt in coastal air.

What should I do after winter to prevent corrosion?

After winter, give the underbody a thorough washing and check for rust on underbody components like the exhaust system and brake lines, treating or replacing them if necessary.

How do I maintain the climate control system when washing the vehicle?

Do not set the air inlet selection to outside air circulation mode if the climate control system is operating while washing the vehicle.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Brake Fluid, Legacy 2023, Maintenance Service Specification, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Exterior care Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Exterior Care Touring XT

Regular maintenance is required for the exterior of the 2023 Subaru Legacy to maintain both its operation and attractiveness. Frequently washing in lukewarm or cold water with mild, neutral detergents is one of the key habits, particularly after being exposed to harsh substances like mud or road salts. To avoid corrosion, the underbody needs special attention, and while cleaning, parts like the brakes, engine compartment, and rearview camera need to be handled carefully. Regular waxing and polishing is advised, taking care not to block crucial components like the windshield washer nozzles. Seasonal inspections and maintenance are essential to maintaining the vehicle’s structural integrity and appearance. It’s also critical to quickly repair any paint damage and shield the car from elements that could cause corrosion.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Exterior care

CAUTION

When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
Do not wash the engine compartment and area adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake or electrical parts, it will cause engine trouble or a malfunction of electrical equipment.
When washing inner fenders, underbody, bumpers, and protruding objects such as exhaust pipes and exhaust finishers, be careful to prevent injuries from contacting sharp ends.
Do not use any organic solvents when washing the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a detergent with organic solvents is used to wash the cover surface, completely rinse off the detergent with water. Otherwise, the cover surface may be damaged.
Outback/Subaru Outbacker. Wilderness: Since your vehicle is equipped with a rear wiper, automatic car-wash brushes could become tangled around it, damaging the wiper arm and other components. Ask the automatic car wash operator not to let the brushes touch the wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm on the rear window glass with adhesive tape before operating the machine.
If the climate control system is operating when you wash the vehicle, do not set the air inlet selection of the climate control to outside air circulation mode. There is a risk that water may enter the vehicle through the air inlets.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash is of a suitable type
The rearview camera lens has a hard coating to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehicle or cleaning the camera lens, be careful not to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a washing brush directly on the camera lens. The image quality of the rearview camera may deteriorate.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s beauty is frequent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road grime. Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap, and bird droppings should be washed off using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent, make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand brush when washing down the underbody, inner fenders, and suspension to effectively remove mud and dirt.

Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts, and gravel used for deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel, brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension. Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents. Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corrosion. After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off the underbody. Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

CAUTION

Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor harnesses, and other parts when washing suspension components.
Be careful not to flush the engine bottom for a long time. It may cause damage of some electrical parts.

Using a warm water washer

Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)or more between the washer nozzle and the vehicle.
Do not wash the same area continuously.
If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand. Some warm water washers are of the high temperature, high-pressure type, and they can damage or deform the resin parts such as moldings, or cause water to leak into the vehicle.

Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing. Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is cool. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the surface no longer repels water. If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.

CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic solvents on the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a polish or wax with organic solvents is applied to the cover surface, completely wipe off the polish or wax. Otherwise, the cover surface may be damaged.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles with wax when waxing the vehicle.
Do not wipe the rearview camera with alcohol, benzene or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with diluted neutral detergent and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to apply the wax to the rearview camera. If it comes in contact with the camera, moisten a clean cloth with diluted neutral detergent to remove the wax.
For Subaru Forester Wilderness models, if the wax gets onto the hood decal when you are waxing your vehicle, this could enhance the reflective appearance of the hood decal and impair the anti-reflective function.

Cleaning alloy wheels

Vehicles without matte-painted wheels

Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
Do not use soap-containing grit to clean any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
Do not use soap-containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing device.
the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing device. wheels) with water as soon as possible when it has been splashed with seawater, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.

Vehicles with matte-painted wheels
Be sure to observe the following precautions as matte-painted wheels can be damaged.

Do not scrub or polish the wheels using a brush or dry cloth.
Do not use any wheel coatings or abrasive detergents.

As matte-painted wheels require different cleaning methods than conventional alloy wheels, be sure to observe the following. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.

Remove dirt using water. If the wheels are excessively dirty, use a sponge or soft cloth dampened with a diluted neutral detergent to remove the dirt.

White Letter Tires
It is recommended to clean the white letter part on the side of the tire frequently because it easily gets dirty. When cleaning, use a neutral detergent and wash with a sponge.

Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain a fine appearance, strength, and reliable operation.

The most common causes of corrosion

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:

It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pollution.
It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures range just above freezing.
Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.
High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle that cannot dry quickly due to a lack of proper ventilation.

To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the body and suspension components. Also, wash the vehicle promptly after driving on any of the following surfaces.

Roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter
Mud, sand, or gravel
Coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing. Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance. Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them. Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock and hood latch should be inspected and lubricated periodically.

FAQ

How often should I wash my Subaru Legacy?

Wash the vehicle at least once a month to prevent contamination from road grime.

Can I wash the Legacy with hot water?

Use lukewarm or cold water, not hot water, and avoid washing in direct sunlight.

What kind of detergent should I use for tough stains like bird droppings or tree sap?

Use a light, neutral detergent for removing tough stains.

How should I wash the underbody of the Legacy?

Thoroughly flush the underbody with lukewarm or cold water, especially after driving off-road or on muddy/sandy roads.

Is there any special consideration for washing the brakes?

When washing the vehicle, be aware that the brakes may get wet, which can lengthen the stopping distance. To dry them, drive at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal.

Should I wax my Subaru Legacy? How often?

Yes, wax the vehicle after washing and drying. Apply wax at least once a month or when the surface no longer repels water.

Can I wax the windshield washer nozzles and rearview camera?

Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles or apply wax on the rearview camera.

What should I do if I get wax on the rearview camera?

If wax contacts the camera, remove it with a cloth moistened with diluted neutral detergent.

How do I clean the wheels of my Legacy?

Use a neutral cleaning agent and rinse thoroughly with water. Avoid using soap-containing grit or high-speed washing devices.

Can I wash the engine compartment?

Avoid washing the engine compartment as water can cause engine trouble or malfunction of electrical equipment.

What should I avoid using when washing the bulb assembly cover?

Do not use organic solvents. If used, rinse off completely with water.

How do I care for matte-painted wheels?

For vehicles without matte-painted wheels, promptly clean off grime and avoid using soap-containing grit.

What are common causes of corrosion on the Legacy?

Accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris, damage to paint and protective coatings from gravel and stone chips, and exposure to road salt, dust control chemicals, or salt in coastal air.

What should I do after winter to prevent corrosion?

After winter, give the underbody a thorough washing and check for rust on underbody components like the exhaust system and brake lines, treating or replacing them if necessary.

How do I maintain the climate control system when washing the vehicle?

Do not set the air inlet selection to outside air circulation mode if the climate control system is operating while washing the vehicle.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Apperance Care, Exterior care, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Jump starting Touring XT Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Jump starting Touring XT

Taking off with the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT, reviving a dead or weak battery is an easy operation. It entails employing a portable jump starter or attaching jumper cables to the working battery of another car. Usually found under the hood, the Legacy’s battery is accessible by unscrewing a cover. The engine is started in a certain order (positive to positive, negative to negative) so that the dead battery can recharge. It is crucial to take safety precautions including avoiding sparks and managing cables properly. If you find yourself needing to jumpstart things repeatedly, it’s best to get the battery checked or replaced. Because of Subaru’s dedication to safety, owners of Legacy Touring XT vehicles can rely on this approach to be dependable and easily accessible in the event of a battery problem.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Jump starting

WARNING

Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID Do not let it come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help. Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump-starting.
Never attempt jump-starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands or other metal jewelry.
Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are available.
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair, and tools away from the cooling fan, belts, and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.
Jumpstarting is dangerous if it is done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic. When your vehicle does not start due to a run-down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump-started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.

How to Jump Start

Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is grounded.
If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.

Booster battery
Strut mounting nut1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.
Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (−) terminal of the booster battery.
Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.
Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery.
When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Engine Overheating
Never remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.

CAUTION
If the engine overheats, the engine speed or the vehicle speed may be reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately.

If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down.

If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment

Keep the engine running at idling speed.
Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn off the engine and contact your authorized dealer for repair.
After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays in the overheated zone, turn off the engine.
After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If the coolant level is below the “LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing down and turning it.

Towing

WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential.

If towing is necessary, SUBARU recommends it be done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service.

Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes
The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency. A towing hook is supplied with Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness only. Legacy is not supplied with a towing hook (the towing hook can be purchased at a SUBARU dealer). On Legacy, the towing access cover is on the rear bumper only. SUBARU recommends towing be done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service.

CAUTION

Use only the specified towing hook and tie-down hooks/holes. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie-down purposes.
Never use the tie-down hole closest to the muffler under the vehicle for towing purposes.

Front towing hook (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
Take out the screwdriver, towing hook, wheel nut wrench, and jack handle from the underfloor storage compartment

Towing hook covers (Depending on the vehicle, there may be only one cover.)
Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not scratch the bumper. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and pry open the cover.
Screw the towing hook into the threaded hole until the threads can no longer be seen.
Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle and wheel nut wrench. After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor storage compartment. Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

Do not use the towing hook for purposes other than towing your vehicle.
Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with the proper operation of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision.

CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive load to the towing hook.

Rear towing hook:
Take out the screwdriver, towing hook, wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the underfloor storage compartment.

Towing hook covers (Depending on the vehicle, there may be only one cover.)

Legacy

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness

Pry off the cover on the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and you will find a threaded hole for attaching the towing hook

Screw the towing hook into the threaded hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle and wheel nut wrench. After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor storage compartment. Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

Do not use the towing hook for purposes other than towing your vehicle.
Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with the proper operation of the fuel pump shut-off function when the vehicle is struck from behind.

CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive load to the towing hook.

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks is located between each of the front tires and the front bumper. Front Tie-down Hooks are for tying down the vehicle. They are not for towing.

Rear tie-down holes:

The rear tie-down holes are located near each of the jack-up reinforcements. There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole. To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes, return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for downward anchoring. If they are used to anchor the vehicle in any other direction, cables may slip out of the holes, possibly causing a dangerous situation.

Using a Flat-Bed Truck

This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following procedures to ensure safe transportation.

Shift the select lever into the “P” position.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION
Transport by flatbed truck may cause the headlights to become misaligned. In such a case, have the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer after transporting the vehicle by a flatbed truck?

Towing with All Wheels on the Ground

WARNING

Never turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while the vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.
Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.

CAUTION

If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
Sometimes damaged vehicles cannot be towed because of their damaged condition. In that case, use a flatbed truck for transportation.
The traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). For greater speeds and distances, transport your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
Use a flatbed truck if there are long-distance downgrades or steep slopes. However, do not apply the brake pedal for a long time because the engine braking will not work while towing. Doing so could overheat the brake.. Drive carefully and do not make an impact on the towing rope by suddenly starting.
Use a specific towing rope for towing. If wire ropes and metal chains are needed to be used for towing, wrap the contact portion of the bumper with a cloth to protect it from damage.

Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.
The ignition switch should be in the “ON” position while the vehicle is being towed.
Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle.

Electronic Parking Brake If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the electronic parking brake.

FAQ

What is jump-starting, and when might it be necessary for the Legacy Touring XT?
Jump-starting is the process of using another vehicle’s battery to start the Legacy Touring XT if its battery is dead or too weak to crank the engine.

What equipment is needed to jump-start the Legacy Touring XT?
You’ll need a set of jumper cables and another vehicle with a functional battery or a portable jump starter.

Where is the battery located in the Legacy Touring XT, and how can it be accessed?
The battery is typically located under the hood, and its location can be found in the owner’s manual. Accessing it usually requires removing a cover.

What precautions should be taken before attempting to jump-start the vehicle?
Ensure both vehicles are turned off, and the key is removed from the ignition. Verify that the jumper cables are not damaged and that the vehicles are not in contact with each other.

Is there a specific procedure for connecting the jumper cables to the Legacy Touring XT’s battery terminals?
Yes, the recommended order is to connect the positive (red) cable to the positive terminal on the dead battery, then the positive terminal on the live battery, followed by the negative (black) cable to the negative terminal on the live battery, and finally, the negative cable to an unpainted metal part of the dead vehicle’s chassis.

How should the Legacy Touring XT’s engine be started after connecting the jumper cables?
Attempt to start the Legacy’s engine, but do not crank it for an extended period. If it doesn’t start after a few tries, wait a few minutes before attempting again.

How long should the vehicles remain connected after the Legacy Touring XT’s engine starts?
Allow the engine to run for a few minutes to recharge the battery. Then, disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order of connection.

Can the Legacy Touring XT be jump-started using a portable jump starter instead of another vehicle?
Yes, a portable jump starter can be used as an alternative to another vehicle.

What should be done if the Legacy Touring XT’s battery is repeatedly dead or weak?
If the battery continues to have issues, it’s advisable to have it inspected and possibly replaced by a Subaru service technician.

Is there a specific type of battery recommended for the Legacy Touring XT?
The recommended battery type and specifications can be found in the owner’s manual.

Are there any safety precautions to consider during the jump-starting process?
Avoid touching the jumper cable clamps together or allowing them to touch metal objects, as this can create sparks. Follow all safety instructions in the owner’s manual.

What if the Legacy Touring XT’s engine doesn’t start even after jump-starting attempts?
If the engine still doesn’t start, there may be underlying issues, and it’s recommended to consult a Subaru service center.

Can jump-start the vehicle cause damage to the Legacy Touring XT’s electrical system?
When done correctly, jump-starting is safe, but incorrect connections or repeated attempts without success can potentially damage the electrical system, so it’s important to follow the correct procedure.

Is there a recommended interval for replacing the Legacy Touring XT’s battery?
The battery’s lifespan can vary, but it’s typically recommended to inspect and potentially replace the battery every 3-5 years.

Are there any specific maintenance tasks related to the battery that Legacy Touring XT owners should be aware of?
Regularly checking the battery terminals for corrosion and ensuring they are clean and securely connected can help maintain battery health.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, In Case of Emergency, Jump Starting, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Key Fob Touring XT System

Subaru Legacy 2023 Access key fob –If Access key fob Touring XT

A smart key fob is included with the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT, adding ease and security. With the convenience of keyless entry, drivers may remotely lock and unlock the doors of their vehicle with this contemporary key fob. It also frequently has features that enhance regular driving, like a trunk release button and remote engine start. The car’s alarm is triggered by a panic button in case of emergency. Long-term performance is guaranteed by the key fob’s changeable battery, while cutting-edge security features like encryption and rolling codes prevent unwanted access. The key fob of the Legacy Touring XT enhances the car’s dedication to a safe and smooth driving experience with a variety of useful features.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly

CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic sources, and signal transmitters away from the area between the access key fob and the push-button ignition switch. They may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the push button ignition switch. The following functions may be inoperable because of strong radio signals in the surrounding area or a low battery condition of the access key fob.

Locking/unlocking doors including the rear gate
Switching power status
Starting engine

In such cases, perform the following procedure. When the battery of the access key fob is discharged, replace it with a new one.

Locking and Unlocking

Release button
Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency key.

NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to attach the emergency key back to the access key fob.

Switching Power Status

Apply the parking brake.
Shift the select lever into the “P” position.
Depress the brake pedal.
Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the push button ignition switch with it. When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At the same time, the status of the push-button ignition switch changes to either of the following.
When the keyless access with the push-button start system is deactivated, press the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal released. The status of the push-button ignition switch then changes to “ON”.

When the keyless access with the push-button start system is deactivated: “ACC”
Under other conditions: “ON”

NOTE
If the power does not switch even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Starting Engine

Apply the parking brake.
Shift the select lever into the “P” position.
Depress the brake pedal.
Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it. When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At the same time, the push-button ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
After the push-button ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE
If the engine does not start even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Rear Gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened
In the event that you cannot open the rear gate by pressing the rear gate opener button (all models) or using the power rear gate (if equipped), you can open it from inside the cargo area.

Remove the access cover at the bottom center of the rear gate trim using a flat-head screwdriver.

CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock release lever with your fingers because doing so may cause an injury. Always use a flat-head screwdriver or a similar tool.

Models without power rear gate Rear gate lock release lever

Models with power rear gate Rear gate lock release lever

2. Turn the rear gate lock release lever to the right position using a flathead screwdriver or a similar tool. Then the rear gate will open.

Malfunctions of the Center Information Display
If the following screens are displayed, temporary errors or malfunctions may occur in the center information display. If they are only temporary errors, the following procedure may help to eliminate them.

Shutting down the screen

Park the vehicle in a safe place.
Turn the ignition switch once to the “LOCK/OFF” position, then start the engine.
If the center information display cannot be recovered even though the engine has been restarted, press and hold the volume
If the center information display is not recovered by restarting it, contact your SUBARU dealer.

If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident
To Restart the Engine When Involved in an Accident

CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an accident, be sure to inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that fuel has leaked on the ground, do not try to restart the engine. The fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Immediately contact the nearest automotive service facility. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer. Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut-off system. When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump shut-off system stops supplying the fuel in order to minimize fuel leakage. Perform the following procedures to restart the engine after the system is activated. Models without “keyless access with push-button start system”

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
Restart the engine. Models with “keyless access with push-button start system”:
Turn the push-button ignition switch to the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
Restart the engine.

Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation When Involved in an Accident
When the automatic door locking/unlocking function is ON, all the doors will be locked automatically while driving. When the vehicle sustains a strong impact which may trigger the airbags to deploy, the door locks may be unlocked automatically to enable emergency escape. Generally, an impact sustained from a rear-end collision does not trigger the airbags to deploy. However, if the impact is strong enough to deploy the airbags, it can also trigger the unlocking function. Under such circumstances, the automatic door locking/unlocking function will be suspended and the doors will remain unlocked. Confirm the safety of the surroundings first and carry out the following to retrieve the automatic door locking/unlocking function.

Models without “keyless access with push-button start system”:

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.

Models with “keyless access with push-button start system”:

Turn the push-button ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
Turn the push-button ignition switch to the “ON” position.

NOTE
Depending on the severity of the impact, emergency unlocking may not function.

CAUTION

If the following occurs, there may be a malfunction in the system. Have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.
The doors unlock automatically while driving.
With all doors shut, the door sun locks when pressing the lock side of the power door locking switch. The automatic door locking/unlocking function does not operate.

FAQ

What type of key fob does the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT come with?
The Legacy Touring XT typically comes with a modern key fob equipped with various functions.

How does the key fob allow the driver to lock and unlock the vehicle?
The key fob typically has buttons that allow the driver to remotely lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors.

Are there keyless entry features on the Legacy Touring XT?
Yes, the Legacy Touring XT often includes keyless entry, allowing the driver to unlock the doors without physically using the key fob.

Can the key fob be used to start the engine remotely?
Some Legacy models may offer remote engine start functionality using the key fob.

Is there a button on the key fob for the trunk or rear hatch release?
The key fob typically includes a button for remotely opening the trunk or rear hatch.

What is the range of the key fob’s remote functions, such as locking and unlocking the doors?
The range can vary but is generally within a few feet to a dozen or more feet from the vehicle.

Is there a panic button on the key fob for emergency situations?
Yes, the key fob often includes a panic button that activates the vehicle’s alarm in case of an emergency.

Can the key fob’s battery be replaced, and how often should it be replaced?
Yes, the key fob’s battery is replaceable, typically every 1-2 years depending on usage.

Does the Legacy Touring XT have a feature to locate the vehicle in a crowded parking lot using the key fob?
Some models may offer a feature that activates the vehicle’s lights and horn to help locate it in a crowded parking lot.

Is there a specific procedure for pairing or reprogramming the key fob to the vehicle?
If needed, the vehicle’s owner’s manual typically provides instructions for pairing or reprogramming the key fob.

What security features are in place to prevent unauthorized access to the vehicle through the key fob?
Subaru employs security measures to prevent unauthorized access, such as encryption and rolling codes for keyless entry systems.

Can multiple key fobs be paired with the Legacy Touring XT, and is there a limit to the number of fobs?
Multiple key fobs can usually be paired with the vehicle, but there may be a limit specified in the owner’s manual.

What should be done if the key fob is lost or stolen?
In the event of a lost or stolen key fob, it’s advisable to contact the dealership to have the key fob deactivated and replaced.

Is there a way to customize settings using the key fob, such as seat and mirror adjustments?
Some Legacy models may offer personalized settings that can be activated using the key fob.

Can the key fob’s functions be disabled if needed, for example, to prevent unauthorized use?
Subaru typically offers options to disable certain key fob functions if desired, providing an added layer of security.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Access key fob –If Access key fob Does Not Operate Properly, In Case of Emergency, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Park Vehicle In Emergency Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Vehicle In Case Of An Emergency Touring XT

With its integrated emergency parking brake, the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT provides a dependable and safe emergency parking option. When parking, this feature lets drivers manually apply the brake, giving them more confidence that the car will stay still—especially on hills or with the transmission in “Park.” Subaru makes sure that the emergency parking brake is simple for the driver to activate and release, increasing convenience and reducing anxiety when parking in an emergency. This attention to safety comes first. The emergency parking brake on the Legacy Touring XT is a trustworthy safety element that helps provide a secure and confident parking experience, regardless of the situation—a steep hill or a routine halt.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch position. Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle. The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon as possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use. Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. The correct pressure is 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 k gf/cm2). When using the temporary spare tire, note the following.

Drive with caution when the temporary spare tire is installed. Avoid hard acceleration and braking, or fast cornering, as control of the vehicle may be lost.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly.
Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.
Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.

Tread wear indicator bar
Indicator location mark

When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire.
The temporary spare tire must be used only on the rear wheel. If a front wheel tire gets punctured, replace the wheel with a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools.

Jack
Jack handle
Screwdriver
Towing hook (eye bolt) Outback/ Subaru Outback Wilderness)
Wheel nut wrench
Torque wrench (Outback)

CAUTION
The torque wrench is designed to be used only when changing the position of the crossbar. Do not use the torque wrench in other cases. Otherwise, the torque wrench may be deformed.

NOTE
To use the jack handle, insert the jack handle into the hole of the wheel nut wrench.

Legacy

Under-floor storage compartment
Wheel nut wrench
Screwdriver
Jack handle
Jack

The maintenance tools are stored in the under-floor storage compartment.

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness
Type A

Under-floor storage compartment
Torque wrench for roof rails
Wheel nut wrench
Towing hook (eye bolt)
Jack
Jack handle
Screwdriver

The maintenance tools are stored in the under-floor storage compartment.

Type B

Torque wrench for roof rails (if equipped)
Wheel nut wrench
Jack
Jack handle
Towing hook (eye bolt)
Screwdriver

Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

Changing a flat tire

Use only the jack and the jack handle provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack
Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the ground and this can result in serious injury or death.
Before jacking up the vehicle, be sure that there are no occupants or cargo on board.
Do not jack up the vehicle with an object on or underneath the jack. The jack can be unstable and this can result in a severe accident.
Always turn off the engine before raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack.
Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in serious injury or death.
All passengers must exit the vehicle before you raise it with the jack. Raising the vehicle with someone inside of it could result in serious injury or death.
Do not start the vehicle while it is supported by the jack
Doing so could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION
Do not hit and bend the disc rotor backing plate when removing and installing the tire. A bent backing plate may scrape against the disc rotor and cause noise while the vehicle is in motion.

NOTE
Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking up the vehicle using a garage jack.

Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
Apply the parking brake securely and shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models) or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position (CVT models).
Turn on the hazard warning flasher and unload all occupants and luggage from the vehicle.
Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
Take out the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench.1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
NOTE
- Make sure that the jack is well lubricated before using it.
- To take out the tools and spare tire, store the cargo area cover to the original position and open the under-floor storage.
Take out the tool bucket and turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.
NOTE
Carefully read Temporary Spare Tire and strictly follow the instructions.
1. Notch
2. Valve hole
If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on the opposite side of the valve hole and pry the wheel cover to remove it.
Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
Insert the jack handle into the hole of the wheel nut wrench.
Insert the jack handle into the jack screw, and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary.
Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth.
Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.
1. Support holder
Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment. Install with the support holder facing upward and secure the flat tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.
NOTE
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try turning the support holder upside down.
Store the jack, jack handle, and wheel nut wrench in their storage locations.

NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is a temporary spare tire, carefully read “Temporary spare tire” 􀀁9-2 and strictly follow the instructions.

WARNING
Never place a tire or tire-changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with the warning message indicated by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.
- Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
- Slowly pull off the road to a safe place.
- Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
- If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly
- If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or another qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if the sealant residue is properly cleaned off. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected

TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models)

FAQ

Does the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT come equipped with an emergency parking brake?
Yes, the Legacy Touring XT typically features an emergency parking brake, also known as a handbrake or e-brake.

How is the emergency parking brake engaged in the Legacy Touring XT?
The emergency parking brake is usually engaged by pulling up on a lever or pressing a button in the center console.

What is the purpose of the emergency parking brake in the Legacy Touring XT?
The emergency parking brake is primarily used to secure the vehicle in place when parked, especially on inclines or when the transmission is in “Park.”

Can the emergency parking brake be manually disengaged by the driver?
Yes, the driver can typically release the emergency parking brake by pressing a button, pulling a lever, or activating a switch.

Is there an indicator or warning light to inform the driver when the emergency parking brake is engaged?
Yes, the Legacy Touring XT typically has a warning light on the dashboard to indicate when the emergency parking brake is engaged.

Can the emergency parking brake be used in conjunction with the vehicle’s regular brakes for added security?
Yes, it can provide additional security when parking on steep slopes or to prevent unintended movement.

Does the Legacy Touring XT have an automatic parking brake feature?
Some models may offer an automatic parking brake feature that engages the brake when the vehicle is turned off or shifted into “Park.”

What precautions should be taken when using the emergency parking brake in winter or icy conditions?
It’s essential to use the parking brake judiciously in icy conditions to prevent it from freezing or sticking.

Can the emergency parking brake be used as an emergency stopping mechanism while driving?
The emergency parking brake is not designed for emergency stopping while driving and should not be used as a substitute for the regular brakes.

How does the Legacy Touring XT ensure the emergency parking brake is released before driving?
Most modern vehicles have a safety interlock system that requires the brake to be disengaged before the vehicle can be moved.

Is there a recommended procedure for engaging the emergency parking brake when parking on a hill?
It’s advisable to engage the brake before shifting into “Park” when parking on a hill for added security.

Does the Legacy Touring XT have any features related to automatic parking or parking assistance?
Some models may offer advanced parking assist features, but these are separate from the emergency parking brake.

What maintenance or inspections should be performed on the emergency parking brake?
Regular inspections and lubrication may be necessary to ensure the emergency parking brake functions correctly.

Can the emergency parking brake be used in conjunction with the regular brakes for emergency braking in certain situations?
While it can provide additional stopping force, it should not be relied upon as the primary method for emergency braking, as regular brakes are more effective.

Is there a recommended procedure for disengaging the emergency parking brake after a period of non-use?
It’s advisable to engage and disengage the brake periodically to prevent it from sticking when not in regular use.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, If you Park Your Vehicle In Case Of An Emergency, In Case of Emergency, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Winter driving Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Winter Driving Touring XT

When the temperature drops and the roads are covered with snow, the 2023 Subaru Legacy is a dependable companion since it is designed to perform well in winter driving situations. The Legacy offers outstanding traction and stability with standard symmetrical all-wheel drive (AWD), giving drivers confidence on icy and snow-covered conditions. Comfort and visibility are improved in cold weather by winter-specific amenities like heated seats, a heated steering wheel, and a rapid windshield defroster. Even on chilly mornings, the Legacy’s strong starting power and cold-weather maintenance provide dependability. The Legacy is a solid option for the demands of winter because it is equipped to handle the obstacles of driving on icy highways or through snowy streets.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Winter driving

Operation during cold weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables. Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine in very cold weather conditions. Use engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil will make it harder to start the engine. Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin. Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterward, thoroughly wipe the water away. Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of the vehicle. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades or washer system.

Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and driving dangerous. While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly. Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders periodically.

Parking in cold weather
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in the snow with the engine running.

CAUTION

Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that position.
When the vehicle is parked When the vehicle has been left snowed or when it snows, raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them. parked after use on roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action. Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes, and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage the disc brakes, brake hoses, or ABS harnesses. When parking for long periods in cold weather, you should observe the following tips. When parking for long periods in cold weather, you should observe the following tips. When parking for long periods in cold weather, you should observe the following tips.

Place the select lever in the “P” position.
Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, the use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an anti-freeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty. If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.

Driving on snowy and icy roads

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause a loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engine’s intake system and may hinder the airflow, which could result in engine shutdown or even breakdown. To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle’s speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control. An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle’s braking performance on snowy and icy roads. Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at the roadside, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer to “Hazard warning flasher”.

Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the windshield or rear window, perform the following procedure.

To thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow selection in “ ” and the temperature set for maximum warmth until the wiper blade rubbers are completely thawed.
If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers.
To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers, use the rear window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the airflow selection in “ ” and the temperature set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at the roadside, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers. We recommend the use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons when you can have snow and freezing temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.

Corrosion protection
During high-speed driving, non-freezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper blades. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed.

NOTE
When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace them with standard wiper blades.

Snow tires

WARNING

When replacing or installing winter tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.
- Size
- Speed Symbol
- Load Index
- Circumference
- Construction
- Manufacturer
- Brand (tread pattern)
- Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the driver’s door pillar. If all four tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the following.

Ride
Handling
Braking
Speedometer/Odometer calibration
Clearance between the body and tires It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.
Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all-season tires” as original equipment, which is designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling, and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through the use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. When you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction, brand, and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and the vehicle body. Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.

Tire chains
Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and the vehicle body.

NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, the use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if used on your vehicle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturer’s instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by the use of a traction device is not covered under warranty. Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the front wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Overconfidence because you are using a traction device could easily lead to a serious accident.

Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st.

FAQ

Does the 2023 Subaru Legacy come with all-wheel drive (AWD) for winter driving?
Yes, Subaru’s Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive (AWD) is a standard feature on the Legacy, providing excellent traction in winter conditions.

What winter weather features are included in the Legacy’s design for enhanced safety?
The Legacy typically includes features like Vehicle Dynamics Control (VDC), Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS), and Brake Assist to improve stability and control on icy roads.

Are winter tires recommended for the Legacy in snowy or icy conditions?
While the Legacy’s AWD provides great traction, winter tires are recommended for optimal grip and safety in extreme winter conditions.

Is there a recommended winter tire size for the Legacy?
The recommended winter tire size can vary depending on the specific model and trim. Consult the owner’s manual or a Subaru dealer for guidance.

What is the cold weather starting capability of the Legacy’s engine?
The Legacy is designed to start reliably in cold weather conditions, thanks to a robust battery and starter system.

Does the Legacy have heated seats and a heated steering wheel for winter comfort?
Many Legacy models offer heated seats and a heated steering wheel for added comfort during cold winters.

Is there a feature to defrost the windshield and side mirrors quickly?
The Legacy typically comes equipped with a front windshield defroster and heated side mirrors to clear frost and ice.

How does the Legacy handle snowy or icy roads in terms of stability and control?
Subaru’s Symmetrical AWD system and stability control features provide excellent stability and control on slippery winter roads.

What measures can be taken to prepare the Legacy for winter driving conditions?
Drivers can prepare for winter by installing winter tires, ensuring the vehicle’s battery and heating system are in good condition, and carrying essential winter emergency supplies.

Is there a recommended cold weather maintenance schedule for the Legacy?
Subaru typically recommends routine maintenance checks and using the appropriate cold-weather fluids to keep the vehicle in optimal condition during winter.

Can the Legacy handle deep snow or off-road winter driving?
While the Legacy is well-equipped for typical winter driving, it may not be suitable for extreme off-road or deep snow conditions.

Are there any winter driving tips for Legacy owners?
Tips include practicing cautious and defensive driving, allowing for longer braking distances, and being prepared for changing road conditions.

Does the Legacy come with winter driving modes or settings?
Some Legacy models may offer selectable driving modes that allow drivers to adapt to various conditions, including winter driving.

How does the Legacy’s lighting system perform in low-visibility winter conditions?
The Legacy typically features high-quality headlights and fog lights to improve visibility in low-visibility winter conditions.

Is there any information or assistance provided by Subaru for winter driving with the Legacy?
Subaru often provides winter driving tips and resources to help owners navigate winter safely.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.htm

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, autouserguide, Driving Trips, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual, Winter Driving

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Trailer towing (Legacy) Touring XT System

Subaru Legacy 2023 Trailer towing (Legacy) Touring XT

The 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT is an amazing car that adds a whole new level of versatility and power to the sedan market. One of its many great features that stands out is its ability to pull a trailer. This makes it the perfect choice for people who need to haul things or pull a trailer while still enjoying the comfort and style of a sedan. The towing system in the Legacy Touring XT is made to handle long trips and heavy loads, and it does so with the level of sophistication and refinement that has come to be associated with the Subaru name. In this introduction, we’ll talk about the most important parts of the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT’s trailer towing system, from how well it works to how it’s made. This will give you a full picture of what the car can do in this area. Because it can pull so much, the Legacy Touring XT is ready to impress whether you’re an explorer looking to explore the great outdoors or just need to tow a caravan for work.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Trailer Towing (Legacy)

CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that may result from trailer towing, from any trailer towing equipment or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment. SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing.

Trailer Towing (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires, and suspension and hurts fuel economy and air conditioning system cooling performance. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend upon the proper use of the correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Drive carefully when towing a trailer, and always consider the following conditions.

Road conditions
Weather conditions
Vehicle load weight
Trailer load weight
Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your vehicle.
Do not use towing equipment other than genuine SUBARU towing equipment. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on the correct installation and use provided by SUBARU.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions. Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tightened securely. SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. Refer to “Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving. After approximately the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of towing all trailer hitch bolts should be re-tightened to the installation torque.

Maximum Load Limits
Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following. Exceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage.

CAUTION
Before towing a trailer, check the trailer’s total weight, GVW, GAWs, and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

Total trailer weight 2.4 L models

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum total trailer weight. The maximum total trailer weight is indicated in the following tables.

Conditions	Maximum total trailer weight	Maximum tongue weight
When towing a trailer without brakes.	1,000 l bs (453 kg)	100 lbs (45 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.	3,500 l bs (1,588 kg)	350 lbs (159 kg)

Conditions	Maximum total trailer weight	Maximum tongue weight
When towing a trailer without brakes.	1,000 l bs (453 kg)	100 l bs (45 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.	2,700 l bs (1,224 kg)	270 l bs (122 kg)

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale. The GVWR of your vehicle that is set by SUBARU is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s door of your vehicle.

The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR of your vehicle that are set by SUBARU are also shown on the certification label. To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

Tongue load

WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of the trailer’s axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially during braking or when the vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in oversteer, spin out and/or jackknifing. Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value. For details about the trailer tongue load, refer to “Total trailer weight”

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the following illustration. When weighing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing coupler at the height at which it would be during actual towing, using a jack as shown.

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front; approximately 60% of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40% in the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

Connecting a Trailer

Trailer brakes
Do not directly connect your trailer’s hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. The direct connection would cause the vehicle’s brake performance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident. Check that your trailer’s brakes conform with Federal, state/province, and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU’s brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more information about the trailer’s brake system.

Trailer safety chains
Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage. In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Two chains should be used in total, one to the right side and the other to the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains crossing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue disconnects from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations.

Trailer lights
Direct splicing or other improper connections of trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction of your vehicle’s lighting system. Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical system requires modifications to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals and the stop lights each time you connect a trailer to your vehicle.

Tires

Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle. Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s specifications. In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a commercial road service representative or professional to repair the flat tire. If you carry a regular-size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.

Trailer Towing Tips

For models equipped with the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) driving support systems, when towing a trailer, touch “BSD/RCTA” to deactivate the system. The system may not operate properly due to the blocked radar waves.
For models equipped with Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, consult your SUBARU dealer for additional information about towing a trailer.
Towing a trailer in high temperatures, or on long or steep grades, pay attention to the following gauge and indicator because the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating.
Coolant temperature gauge.
AT OIL TEMP warning light. When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance will be different when compared to normal operation. You should never drive at excessive speeds but always employ extra caution when towing a trailer. You should also keep the following tips in mind.
When parking on a steep slope with a trailer attached to your vehicle, the braking power of the electronic parking brake may not be sufficient since strong braking power is needed.

Before starting out on a trip

Check the towing regulations for trailer or caravan vehicles that vary by state/region. Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also negate your insurance coverage and/or may violate the state road and traffic acts and regulations.
Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mounting are in good condition. If any problems are apparent, do not tow the trailer.
Check that the vehicle rests horizontally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
Check that the tire pressures are correct.
Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that
The trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball.
The trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer’s stop lights illuminate when the vehicle’s brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s turn signal lights flash when the vehicle’s turn signal lever is operated.
The safety chains are connected properly.– All cargo in the trailer is secured safely in position.
The side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a significant blind spot.. Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping, and backing up.
When using the 2.4 L turbo engine model to tow a trailer, SUBARU recommends using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher to reduce the risk of engine overheating.

Driving with a trailer

You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control.
Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations.
Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns, and rapid lane changes.
Slow down before turning. Make a larger than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and promptly begin decelerating your vehicle at a gradual pace.
When passing other vehicles, a considerable distance is required because of the added weight and length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can be difficult and requires experience. Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

To reverse around a corner, perform the following procedure.

Reverse slowly and steer in the opposite direction to the way you want to turn.
Once the trailer begins to swing around, straighten the steering wheel.
Turn the wheel in the opposite direct Overheating”
Steer the vehicle around to be in line with the trailer, then straighten the steering again.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Driving on grades

Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.
When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating. . When driving uphill in hot weather, because the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating, pay attention to the following items.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
AT OIL TEMP warning light.
If any of the following conditions occur, immediately turn off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe location. Refer to “If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency” and “Engine Engine coolant temperature gauge needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer to “Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge”
AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates. Refer to “AT OIL TEMP Warning Light
Do not use the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake. You should not park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps:

Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes.
Shift into “P” and shut off the engine.

FAQ

Can the 2023 Subaru Legacy tow a trailer?

Subaru Legacy models are not typically known for heavy towing capabilities. However, they can typically tow smaller trailers, such as lightweight utility trailers or small camping trailers. The towing capacity may vary depending on the specific model and engine.

What is the towing capacity of the 2023 Subaru Legacy?

The towing capacity of a Subaru Legacy can vary depending on the engine and trim level. It’s best to check the owner’s manual or consult with a Subaru dealer for the specific towing capacity of the 2023 model.

What should I consider before towing with a Subaru Legacy?

Before towing, consider factors like the trailer’s weight, weight distribution, trailer brakes, and the condition of your vehicle. Ensure that your Legacy is equipped with the necessary towing equipment and that you follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Can I tow a camper with a Subaru Legacy?

Depending on the camper’s size and weight, you may be able to tow a small camper with a Subaru Legacy. However, it’s important to stay within the vehicle’s towing capacity and consider the impact on fuel efficiency and handling.

Do I need a special hitch for towing with a Subaru Legacy?

Yes, you will need a compatible hitch for towing. Subaru and aftermarket manufacturers offer various hitch options designed to fit Subaru Legacy models.

Should I use trailer brakes when towing with a Subaru Legacy?

If you are towing a trailer that exceeds a certain weight, it is recommended to use trailer brakes for added safety and control. Check your local regulations for specific requirements.

Can I install a trailer hitch on a Subaru Legacy myself?

It is possible to install a trailer hitch on a Subaru Legacy yourself if you have the necessary tools and skills. However, it’s often recommended to have a professional install it to ensure it’s done correctly and safely.

What is the recommended trailer tongue weight for a Subaru Legacy?

The recommended trailer tongue weight can vary based on the specific Legacy model and towing capacity. Consult your owner’s manual or contact a Subaru dealer for the recommended tongue weight for your vehicle.

Are there any specific maintenance tasks for towing with a Subaru Legacy?

Towing can put additional stress on your vehicle, so it’s essential to perform regular maintenance, such as checking brakes, tires, and the transmission. Follow the manufacturer’s maintenance schedule and guidelines.

Can I tow with a Subaru Legacy in all-wheel drive (AWD) mode?

Some Subaru Legacy models come with all-wheel drive (AWD) as a standard feature. You can typically tow in AWD mode, but it’s essential to consult your owner’s manual for any specific recommendations or restrictions.

Is there a towing package available for the 2023 Subaru Legacy?

Subaru may offer a towing package or accessories for towing purposes. Check with your local Subaru dealer for information on available towing packages for the 2023 model.

What type of trailer wiring is compatible with a Subaru Legacy?

Subaru Legacy models typically use standard trailer wiring connectors such as 4-pin or 7-pin connectors. The type of wiring you need will depend on the trailer you plan to tow.

Are there any weight distribution systems recommended for towing with a Subaru Legacy?

If you are towing a trailer with a significant tongue weight, you may want to consider using a weight distribution system to help balance the load and improve stability. Consult your owner’s manual for guidance on weight distribution systems compatible with your vehicle.

Can I tow a boat with a Subaru Legacy?

You may be able to tow a small boat with a Subaru Legacy, but it’s essential to stay within the vehicle’s towing capacity and ensure your trailer and boat combination is safe and properly equipped.

What should I do if I experience trailer sway while towing with a Subaru Legacy?

If you experience trailer sway, ease off the accelerator, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel, and avoid sudden steering movements or braking. Consider using a weight distribution system and ensure proper weight distribution in the trailer to reduce sway.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Driving Trips, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, Trailer towing (Legacy)., User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Loading vehicle Touring XT Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Loading your vehicle Touring XT

The 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT has an adaptable loading capacity to meet a range of transport requirements. It has a roomy trunk that can hold up to 15.1 cubic feet of stuff, which is more than enough space for luggage, groceries, and daily necessities. Conveniently folding the rear seats into a 60/40 split configuration allows you to accommodate larger or longer things in the cargo compartment while still leaving room for passengers. If installed, roof rails provide even more carrying options for large items or freight carriers. Because of Subaru’s dedication to functionality and adaptability, the Legacy Touring XT is a trustworthy option for both shorter trips and daily errands. It can adjust to your cargo requirements.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

Never allow passengers to ride on a folded rear seatback in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.
Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible.
When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
Secure long items properly to prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop.
Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Do not place anything on the rear shelf behind the rear seatback (Legacy) or the extended cargo area cover (Outback â€“ if equipped). Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.

NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.

Vehicle capacity weight

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver’s side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the bottom of the driver’s side door pillar shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment, and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle – including standard equipment, fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle capacity weight. In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle. Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage. When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle. If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher load range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Roof rails (if equipped)

CAUTION

For cargo-carrying purposes, the roof molding must be used together with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying attachment.
Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.
When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle and create a safety hazard.
Do not install a roof tent on the vehicle. Doing so may damage the vehicle and create a safety hazard. SUBARU warranties do not cover vehicle damage resulting from use of a roof tent.

Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and installing the appropriate carrying attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
When carrying cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and carrying attachments, never exceed the maximum load limit as explained below. You should also be careful that the vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The maximum total load on the roof (including crossbars, carrying attachments, and cargo) must not exceed 88 lbs (40 kg). Refer to the crossbar installation instructions for the maximum crossbar capacity. Place the heaviest load at the bottom, close to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachments such as load carriers, crossbars, bike carriers, ski carriers, kayak carriers, cargo baskets, etc., follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the load capacity and make sure that the attachments are securely installed. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering, and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

Removal and installation of the crossbars

Each of the two roof moldings has two mounting points for crossbars. Each mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use a screwdriver to open the covers. When installing the crossbars on the roof molding, follow the manufacturer €™s instructions.

Roof Rails with Integrated Crossbars (Outback)

Integrated crossbars

CAUTION

For cargo-carrying purposes, the crossbars must be extended across the roof and locked into the roof rails. Cargo must be attached to the crossbars using genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments. The crossbars must never be used independently to carry cargo on the roof. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.
When loading cargo on the crossbars, using the genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments, make sure the total weight of the crossbar attachments, and loaded cargo, does not exceed the maximum load limit of 150 lbs (67.5 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle and create a safety hazard.
Be careful not to damage the vehicle’s body when passing the rope through the front and rear holes of the roof rails.
Do not install a roof tent on the vehicle. Doing so may damage the vehicle and create a safety hazard. SUBARU warranties do not cover vehicle damage resulting from the use of a roof tent.

The crossbars must be extended across the roof and locked into the roof rails to carry cargo on the roof. Cargo can only be carried on the crossbars using the genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the crossbars and a carrying attachment, never exceed the maximum load limit explained in the following. You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The maximum load limit of the cargo and carrying attachment must not exceed the allowable load limit described in the Owner’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachments such as load carriers, crossbars, bike carriers, ski carriers, kayak carriers, cargo baskets, etc., follow the manufacturer’s instructions of the load capacity and make sure that the attachments are securely installed. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics. Drive carefully, and avoid rapid starts, hard cornering, and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.
Restore the bars to the original position when the bars are not used as crossbars.

How to use as crossbars

Do not raise the bar higher than necessary. The base of the bar may be damaged.
Be careful not to contact the bars while sliding them. Otherwise, the bars may be scratched or the latch portions may be damaged.
Do not allow the bar to fall on or contact the roof panel or the moonroof when sliding the bar. Otherwise, the roof panel may be dented or the glass of the moon-roof may be damaged.
Be careful hands do not become pinched when operating the crossbar. Hands becoming pinched could result in injury.

Pull out the integrated crossbars from the roof rail holders by pulling up the covers.
Slide the bars in the direction shown in the illustration.
Install the bars into the holders.
Make sure that the latches are fitted securely.

How to change the position of the crossbar
Carefully read the warning label attached to the roof rail.
You can change the position of the rear crossbar. To change the position, perform the following procedure.

Take out the torque wrench from the under-floor storage compartment.
Remove the plastic plug of the roof rail holder by using the torque wrench.
Remove the bolt of the crossbar by using the torque wrench and pull this side out.
Pull out the other side of the crossbar from the roof rail holder by pulling up the cover.
Install both ends of the crossbar into the other holders.
1. Guide plate
2. Torque wrench
Using the torque wrench, tighten the crossbar bolts until the torque wrench hits the guide plate.
NOTE
The tightening torque is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12 + 3.0 N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).
Install the plastic plug by pushing it into the hole until it is fully seated.

How to re-stow bars
Do not use the bars as roof rails when the bars are stowed.

Check that the rear crossbar is stowed in the front side holder. If the rear crossbar is stowed in the rear side holder, move it back to the front side holder (original position).
Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail holders by pulling up the covers.
Slide the bars in the direction shown in the illustration.
Install the bars into the holders.
Make sure that the latches are fitted securely.

Roof Rails with Ladder Type (Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Roof rails

Cargo can be carried on the roof after securing the roof crossbars to the roof rails and installing the appropriate carrying attachments. When installing the roof crossbars and the carrying attachments, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. The roof rail system is designed to carry loads (cargo, roof crossbars and carrying attachments) of no more than 220 lbs (100 kg). Be sure not to exceed your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.

CAUTION

When using the carrying attachments, make sure that the total carrying load of the cargo, roof crossbars, and carrying attachments does not exceed 220 lbs (100 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle. Read the manufacturer’s instructions and pay attention to not exceeding the load limit of the parts.
For cargo-carrying purposes, the roof rails must be used together with the SUBARU recommended roof crossbars and any appropriate carrying attachment that may be needed. The roof rails must never be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint, or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

Rope hooks (attached to the roof rails)

Rope hooks
Covers

CAUTION

When you use the rope hooks, always secure the rope at all four hook points.
The maximum load capacity is 176 lbs (80 kg) per hook.
The cover cannot be removed. . Do not tighten the rope excessively. Otherwise, it may lead to damage to the vehicle body or cargo
Check that the rope is not loose before driving the vehicle.
When you use the rope hooks, never exceed the maximum load limit.

Roof Tent (Subaru Outback Wilderness)

WARNING
Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof can adversely affect the handling, braking, and rollover resistance. The vehicle must never be driven with a total roof rail load in excess of 220 lbs (100 kg).

CAUTION

The roof rail load limit for stationary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg)) applies only when the vehicle is parked and the load is evenly distributed left/right and front/rear and the roof crossbars and roof tent are tightly secured to the vehicle. If these conditions are not met, the load limit will be lower.
The maximum load limit of the roof crossbars must be obtained from the manufacturer or retailer of the roof rack. When driving the vehicle, the maximum roof rail load is 220 lbs (100 kg) or the crossbar load limit (whichever is lower).

Roof tents may be used under certain conditions at your own risk.

When driving the vehicle
The total weight on the roof rails, including the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not exceed the vehicle roof rail load of 220 lbs (100 kg), evenly distributed.

Roof rails
Roof crossbars
Roof tent
B + C < 220 lbs (100 kg)

When the vehicle is parked on level ground

Roof rails
Roof crossbars
Roof tent
Occupants in the roof tent

The total weight on the roof rails –including the roof crossbars, roof tent, and all occupants and contents in the roof tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly distributed or the load limit of the roof crossbars, whichever is lower.
The load limit of the roof rail (A). B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)
Exceeding this load limit could cause damage to the vehicle or racking system. The vehicle must never be driven with occupants in the roof tent. Before the vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo must be removed from the roof tent and the roof rail load must be restored to within the roof rail load limit of 220 lbs (100 kg). Refer to the user manual that accompanied the roof tent for important safety information and instructions on the proper installation and use of the tent.

Trailer Hitch (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness –If Equipped)

Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situation.
Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas that is dangerous, or even lethal if inhaled. Also, drilling the frame or underbody of your vehicle could cause deterioration of the strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole.
Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
Use only a ball mount that is suitable for the trailer hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight-carrying hitch. Do not use any type of weight-distributing hitch.
The standard bumper beam must be installed after you remove the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU dealer for the purchase of a standard bumper beam if you do not have the original.
If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not possible to install the rear towing hook.

CAUTION
Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equipment.
When any of the tires are punctured, you can seal the tire temporarily. However, do not tow a trailer when a sealed tire is used. We recommend that you consult the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. The maximum gross trailer weight and maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table.

Maximum gross trailer weight

Maximum gross tongue weight

2.4 L models

3,500 lbs

(1,588 kg)

350 lbs

(159 kg)

2.5 L models

2,700 lbs

(1,224 kg)

270 lbs

(122 kg)

Connecting a SUBARU Genuine Trailer Hitch

Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.
Insert the hitch pin into the hole located on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.
Insert the safety pin through the provided hole on the hitch pin securely.
Check the ball mount assembly by pulling on it to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver.
1. Hitch ball installation point
2. Hooks for safety chains
Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount.
Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Two chains should be used in total, one to the right side and the other to the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains crossing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue disconnects from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.
WARNING
- For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with safety chains.
- Do not connect safety chains to any part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks.
- Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.
  Hitch harness connector
Connect the hitch wire harness’s black four-pin wire connector to the towing trailer’s wire harness.
Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake, stop and turn signal lights on the trailer.

NOTE

A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer.
Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a watercraft.

If Not Towing a Trailer
The housing should be kept clean at the points of contact. The surfaces only require cleaning with a cloth. Grease or other lubricants should never be used.

Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube.
Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the hitch wire harness to protect against possible damage.
Occasionally lubricate the terminals of the four-pin connector using terminal grease.

FAQ

What is the cargo capacity of the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT?

The Legacy Touring XT typically offers a trunk capacity of around 15.1 cubic feet (428 liters).

Are there any cargo capacity differences between the Touring XT and other Legacy trims?

Cargo capacity remains relatively consistent across Legacy trims, with minor variations based on optional equipment.

How does the Legacy Touring XT accommodate larger items or additional cargo?

The rear seats can be folded down in a 60/40 split to expand the cargo area and accommodate longer items while maintaining passenger seating.

What is the maximum weight limit for cargo in the Legacy Touring XT’s trunk?

Subaru typically provides a maximum cargo weight rating in the owner’s manual; it’s essential not to exceed this limit to maintain vehicle safety and performance.

Are there any special considerations for loading heavy items into the trunk?

Distributing weight evenly and securing heavy items to prevent shifting is essential to maintain vehicle stability.

Can the Legacy Touring XT accommodate a full-size spare tire in the trunk?

Some Legacy models may have a compact spare tire or a tire repair kit in the trunk, allowing for additional cargo space.

What is the weight limit for the Legacy Touring XT’s roof rails, if equipped?

The roof rail weight limit, if available, is typically mentioned in the owner’s manual or on the vehicle’s specifications.

Is there a maximum roof load capacity for cargo carriers or roof-mounted items?

Subaru provides guidelines for roof load capacity to ensure safe and stable transport of rooftop cargo carriers or accessories.

Can the Legacy Touring XT tow trailers, and if so, what is the towing capacity?

The Legacy Touring XT is not typically designed for towing heavy trailers, and its towing capacity may be limited. Refer to the owner’s manual for specific details.

Are there any precautions to take when loading the trunk for a long road trip?

Distributing weight evenly and securing items to prevent movement is crucial to maintaining vehicle balance during long drives.

What cargo accessories or organizers are available for the Legacy Touring XT?

Subaru offers various cargo accessories such as cargo trays, organizers, and cargo nets to help keep the trunk organized and items secure.

Does the Legacy Touring XT come with a spare tire or tire repair kit for emergencies?

Some models may include a compact spare tire or a tire repair kit, ensuring preparedness for unexpected tire issues.

How does the Legacy Touring XT handle cargo storage in inclement weather or during winter?

The vehicle’s trunk is typically weather-sealed to protect cargo from moisture, but using cargo mats or organizers can add an extra layer of protection.

Is there a cargo cover or privacy shade available for the trunk area?

Yes, many Legacy models come equipped with a cargo cover or offer it as an optional accessory for added privacy and security.

Can the Legacy Touring XT accommodate larger items like skis or bicycles?

With the rear seats folded down and the appropriate accessories, the Legacy Touring XT can transport longer items like skis or bicycles.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Driving Trips, Legacy 2023, Loading your vehicle, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy vehicle break-in driving Touring XT Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles

To guarantee the long-term longevity and peak performance of the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT, a recommended break-in driving period of roughly 1,000 miles (or 1,600 kilometers) is included in the package. It is advised that drivers use cautious driving techniques during this time, steering clear of sudden acceleration, fast speeds, and large loads. The idea is to give the engine and other parts time to stabilize and adjust. While driving on a highway is legal, it is recommended to avoid sustained speeds above 55 mph (88 km/h) and to vary your pace. Following these recommendations can help owners of Legacy Touring XTs maintain optimal economy and performance over time, demonstrating Subaru’s dedication to long-term car longevity and customer happiness.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you handle and care for the vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):

Do not race the engine. Do not allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.
Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed, either fast or slow.
Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency.
Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save fuel:

Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.
Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Keep the engine properly tuned.
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label, which is located under the door latch on the driver’s side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
The indication of the ECO gauge shows a reference for saving fuel.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas that is dangerous, or even lethal if inhaled.
Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a long time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.
If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.
Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off. This sound is normal.

Catalytic converter

Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures.
Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

2.5 L models

2.4 L models

The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It catalyzes to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter.
Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
Avoid racing the engine.
Never turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.
Keep your engine tuned up. If you feel backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
Do not apply undercoating or rust-prevention treatment to the heat shield of the catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level.

Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified time or mileage intervals.

Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in another country:

Confirm the availability of the correct fuel.
Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country

Driving tips for AWD models

Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving an All- All-wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.
Size
Speed Symbol
Load Index
Circumference
Construction
Manufacturer
Brand (tread pattern)
Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the driver’s door pillar. If all four tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the following.
- Ride
- Handling
- Braking
- Speedometer/Odometer calibration

Clearance between the body and tires It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drivetrain of your vehicle.

All-wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD models provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt, and sand. By shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force during deceleration. Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two-wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the following tips in mind.

An AWD model is better able to climb conditions than a two-wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire inflation pressure label, which is located under the door latch on the driver’s side.
Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions such as steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than that specified in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
- Engine oil
- Brake fluid
- Rear differential gear oil
- Continuously variable transmission fluid
- Front differential gear oil

There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle.

On-Road and Off-Road Driving

Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. The driver and all passengers should fasten their seatbelts before starting to drive to minimize the chance of serious injury or death.
Do not make sharp turns or quick maneuvers unless unavoidable. Such actions are dangerous, as you may lose control, possibly resulting in a rollover which could cause death or serious injury.
Whenever strong crosswinds are present, slow down sufficiently to maintain control of your vehicle. Remember that your vehicle, with its higher profile and center of gravity, is more likely to be affected by crosswinds than ordinary passenger cars.
Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded with water. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. In this case, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately. Regardless of its depth, it can wash away the ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.

CAUTION
After driving on gravel roads or rough roads, check the undercarriage of the vehicle body for any damage, deformation, or paint removal. If you notice any irregularities, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

Legacy
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. It is a passenger car designed primarily for on-road use. The AWD feature gives it some limited off-road capabilities in situations in which the driving surface is relatively level, obstruction-free, and otherwise similar to on-road driving conditions. Operating it under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage not eligible for repair under warranty. If you do take your SUBARU off-road, you should review the common sense precautions in the next section (applicable to the Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) for general guidance. But please keep in mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness.

Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness
Frequent driving of an AWD model under hard-driving conditions such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than that specified in the maintenance schedule described in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Engine oil
Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage. Your vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. A utility vehicle features a high ground clearance and may be equipped with off-road tires (Subaru Outback Wilderness models only), which enable the vehicle to be used for a wider range of applications. Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clearance, you can drive your SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. Note, however, that your vehicle is not a conventional off-road vehicle or an all-terrain vehicle, and it should not be operated like one. A higher center of gravity about the tread width as compared with ordinary passenger cars makes vehicles of this type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. The high ground clearance of this vehicle is a real advantage, giving you a better view of the road and allowing you to anticipate problems earlier. However, remember that your utility vehicle is not designed for high-speed cornering comparable to ordinary passenger cars and that your vehicle could roll over if you make a sharp turn at high speed. If you do take your SUBARU off-road, certain common sense precautions such as those in the following list should be taken.

Before driving

Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts.
Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, a first aid kit, and a cell phone or citizens band radio.
Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this manual.

During driving
General precautions:

Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain.
Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs, and the like.
Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep.
Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
Do not grip the inside or the spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead, drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
Do not drive or park over or near flammable materials such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the engine is running and right after the engine stops. This could create a fire hazard.
Precautions when driving under especially dangerous situations:
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams:
- First, check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness.
- Next, ensure that the bed of the stream is flat.
- Then, drive slowly and completely through the stream. The water should be shallow enough that it does not reach the vehicle’s undercarriage.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
Do not perform the following operations. Doing so may cause the transmission to overheat or malfunction.
- Depressing the accelerator pedal and brake pedal at the same time while the select lever is in a position other than “P” or “N”.
- Depressing the accelerator to hold the vehicle in a stationary position while on a slope and while the select lever is in a position other than “P” or “N”.
- Trying repeatedly to drive over a bump that the vehicle cannot climb over.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st. Refer to “Selection of Manual Mode”
Do not rotate the tires at a high speed if the vehicle is stuck due to muddy, snowy, icy, or similar low-traction conditions, or if any tire is not touching the ground. Doing so may cause the tires to burst or lead to an accident due to abnormal overheating or damage to drivetrain components.
On rough roads and roads with large undulations, have a leader guide you, or check the road surface in advance to select a road where the ground will not come in contact with the undercarriage of the vehicle body.
Drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less. If you hear any abnormal noise while driving, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.
Do not allow the vehicle tires to be submerged in deep sand, a river, or seawater. If you have to drive under these conditions, thoroughly wash the vehicle after driving. If you hear any abnormal noise while driving, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.
If the wheels are stuck, cutting the steering wheel at a sharp angle may cause the steering components to be deformed. If you hear any abnormal noise while driving or if you notice any abnormalities due to rough running, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.
Avoid driving over curbs. Tires, wheels, suspensions, and the mechanical components under the vehicle body may be unnoticeably damaged by the impact of striking a curb or driving on a rough road. If driving over a curb is unavoidable, ride over it slowly and at a right angle to the curb. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires are not pressed against the curb.
Do not drive for a long time while the vehicle is tilted to the left or right.

After driving

Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads.
After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-body. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.

FAQ

What is the purpose of a vehicle break-in period?
The break-in period allows the engine and various components to settle and adapt, ensuring long-term durability and optimal performance.

How long is the recommended break-in period for the 2023 Legacy Touring XT?
Subaru typically recommends a break-in period of around 1,000 miles (or approximately 1,600 kilometers).

What are the key guidelines for driving during the break-in period?
Drivers are encouraged to avoid excessive acceleration, high speeds, and heavy loads during this period.

Can you clarify what “excessive acceleration” means during the break-in period?
It means refraining from rapid or aggressive acceleration and instead smoothly and gradually increasing speed.

What about highway driving during the break-in period?
While highway driving is acceptable, it’s advisable to vary the vehicle’s speed rather than maintaining a constant speed for extended periods.

Are there speed limits or restrictions during the break-in period?
Subaru recommends avoiding sustained speeds over 55 mph (88 km/h) during the initial break-in.

Can drivers tow trailers or heavy loads during the break-in period?
It’s best to avoid towing heavy loads or using roof racks with significant weight during this period.

What precautions should be taken for downhill driving?
Use engine braking when descending steep grades to avoid excessive brake use.

Does the break-in period apply to the transmission as well?
Yes, it’s important to drive gently and avoid aggressive shifting during this time.

How does the break-in period affect fuel economy?
Fuel economy may not be optimal during the break-in period but should improve as the engine and components settle.

Can the Legacy Touring XT be driven in cold or hot weather during the break-in period?
Yes, it can be driven in various weather conditions, but it’s important to adhere to the recommended driving guidelines.

Are there any specific maintenance tasks recommended during the break-in period?
While not specific to the break-in period, regular maintenance checks, including oil changes and fluid inspections, should be performed as recommended in the owner’s manual.

What benefits can drivers expect after completing the break-in period?
After the break-in period, the engine should be more efficient and capable of delivering peak performance.

Can exceeding the break-in period guidelines harm the vehicle?
While exceeding the guidelines occasionally is unlikely to cause harm, following them helps ensure long-term durability and performance.

How does Subaru ensure that vehicles perform optimally after the break-in period?
Subaru’s manufacturing and quality control processes contribute to vehicles performing well even after the break-in period.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Driving Trips, Legacy 2023, New vehicle break-in driving, Owner Manual, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Fuel Touring XT System Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Fuel Touring XT

The cutting-edge fuel system of the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT creates a balanced blend of efficiency and performance. With its strong 2.4-liter turbocharged engine, this model performs well in terms of power delivery and competitive fuel economy. The Legacy Touring XT uses standard unleaded gasoline as fuel and is equipped with contemporary fuel-saving features, such as an automated start-stop system that reduces engine braking to improve efficiency. Subaru’s careful engineering guarantees effective fuel delivery and combustion, and its selectable driving modes offer drivers the ability to tailor their driving experience to maximize performance and fuel efficiency. This blend of capability, style, and environmental friendliness highlights the Legacy Touring XT’s dedication to providing a comprehensive driving experience.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Fuel

CAUTION

The use of a fuel that is low in quality or the use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause damage to the engine and/or fuel system.
Some gas stations, particularly those in high-altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular octane gasoline with an octane rating below 87 AKI (90 RON).
The use of those fuels is not recommended.

Fuel Requirements
The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

NOTE
When using the 2.4 L turbo engine model to tow a trailer, SUBARU recommends using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher to reduce the risk of engine overheating.

Fuel octane rating
Using gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service technician if you use fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

RON
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

AKI
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driving ability and fuel economy.

Reformulated gasoline
SUBARU supports the use of reformulated gasoline when available. Reformulated gasoline has been blended to burn more cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.

MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may turn on. If this happens, return it to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Gasoline for cleaner air (2.4 L models)
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use high-quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank. Many types of gasoline are now blended with materials called oxygenates. The use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle but should contain no more than 15% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU. Do not use any gasoline that contains more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50, or E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol). In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasoline, which is designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline. If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station operators if their gasoline contains detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions. As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following description.

Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.
Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper solvents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system.
Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.
If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel-related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
Fuel system damage or driveability problems that result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Gasoline for cleaner air (2.5 L models)
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use high-quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank. Many types of gasoline are now blended with materials called oxygenates. The use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle but should contain no more than 10% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU. Do not use any gasoline that contains more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol). In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasoline, which is designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline. If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station operators if their gasoline contains detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions. As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following.

Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.
Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper solvents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.

If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel-related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
Fuel system damage or driveability problems that result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Fuel Filler Lid and Cap
Locations of the fuel filler lid

Refueling
Only one person should be involved in refueling. Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress. Be sure to observe any other precautions that are posted at the service station.

Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ “OFF” position, and turn off all the other electrical components.
To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one of the operations below.
Press the “ ” button on the key fob.
Press the unlock side of the power door locking switch.
Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.
The fuel filler lid opens automatically.
Open it further by hand.

WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap, first touch the vehicle body or a metal portion of the fuel pump or similar object to discharge any static electricity that may be present on your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is a possibility that an electric spark could ignite the fuel, which could burn you. To avoid acquiring a new static electric charge, do not get back into the vehicle while refueling is in progress.

Open
Close

Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position first and then close all vehicle doors and windows. Make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Only handle fuel outdoors. Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.
When opening the cap, grasp it firmly and turn it slowly to the left. Do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck, especially in hot weather. If you hear a hissing sound while you are removing the cap, wait for the sound to stop and then slowly open the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.

Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder inside the fuel filler lid.
When refueling, insert the fuel nozzle securely into the fuel filler pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not fully inserted, its automatic stop-ping mechanism may not function, causing fuel to overflow the tank and creating a fire hazard.
Stop refueling when the automatic stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle activates. If you continue to add fuel, temperature changes or other conditions may cause fuel to overflow from the tank and create a fire hazard.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically stops. Do not add any more fuel
Put the cap back on and turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tightening.

CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

NOTE

You will see the sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the right side of the vehicle.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may illuminate.
To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one of the operations below. However, if these operations are performed when the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid will not lock when it is subsequently closed.
Press the button on the key fob.
Press the lock side of the power door locking switch.
When the doors are locked or unlocked using the automatic door lock system, the fuel filler lid will be locked or unlocked at the same time.

CAUTION

Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
After refueling, turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel may leak out while the vehicle is being driven or fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard.
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank
and emission control system may be damaged. It could also lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine. Continuing to operate your vehicle at an extremely low fuel level may result in a reduction of engine performance.

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened (Legacy)
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be opened from the trunk.

Remove the access cover at the right side of the trunk trim.

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be opened from the cargo area.

Remove the access cover at the right side of the cargo area trim using a flathead screwdriver.

State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer when testing an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model. Testing of an AWD model must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

CAUTION

At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states have Inspection/Maintenance programs to inspect your vehicle’s emission control system. If your vehicle does not pass this test, some states may deny renewal of your vehicle’s registration. Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the performance of the engine’s emission control system. Certified emission inspectors will inspect the onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system as part of the state emission inspection process. The OBDII system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented emission inspection of the OBDII system.

The inspection of the OBDII system consists of a visual operational check of the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an examination of the OBDII system with an electronic scan tool.
A vehicle passes the OBDII system inspection if proper operation of the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) is observed, there are no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness monitors are all complete.
A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) is not properly operating (the light is illuminated or is not working due to a burned-out bulb) or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT READY” is greater than one. If the vehicle’s battery has been recently replaced or disconnected, the OBDII system inspection may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for the emission test. Under this condition, the vehicle driver should be instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to reset the readiness monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.
Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service.
Some states still use dynamometers in their emission inspection program. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in place. Before your vehicle being put on a dynamometer, tell your emission inspector not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emission testing program have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer. Some states use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing program. When properly used, this equipment should not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected in an attempt to bypass AWD for state emission testing. An AWD vehicle must be tested using an AWD dynamometer with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

Preparing to Drive
You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving.

Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed.
Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also, check tires for proper inflation.
Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
Check that no small animals enter the engine compartment.
Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy), and rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness) are fully closed.
Check the adjustment of the seat.
Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Check the gauges, indicator, and warning lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid, and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly, or at fuel stops.

FAQ

What type of fuel does the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT use?

The Touring XT typically uses regular unleaded gasoline.

Is there a turbocharged engine in the Touring XT, and how does it affect fuel efficiency?

Yes, the Touring XT features a 2.4-liter turbocharged engine that may provide robust performance while maintaining respectable fuel efficiency.

What is the estimated fuel economy for the Touring XT model?

Fuel economy figures can vary based on driving conditions and other factors, but the Touring XT is expected to offer competitive fuel efficiency for its class, with city and highway estimates available from Subaru.

Does the Touring XT have a fuel-saving feature like automatic start-stop?

Yes, it is equipped with an automatic start-stop system, which temporarily shuts off the engine when the vehicle is stopped, enhancing fuel efficiency.

What is the fuel tank capacity of the 2023 Legacy Touring XT?

The exact fuel tank capacity may vary, but it’s typically in the range of 18 to 19 gallons.

How does the Legacy Touring XT ensure efficient fuel delivery to the engine?

Subaru employs advanced fuel injection and engine management systems to optimize fuel delivery and combustion for improved efficiency.

Are there driving modes that allow the driver to choose between fuel efficiency and performance?

Many modern vehicles, including the Legacy Touring XT, offer driving modes that allow the driver to select between various settings, potentially affecting fuel efficiency and performance.

Does the Legacy Touring XT have a fuel-saving driving mode?

It may offer driving modes that emphasize fuel efficiency, adapting throttle response and other parameters to maximize mpg.

What maintenance is required for the fuel system in the Touring XT?

Routine maintenance includes fuel filter replacement and fuel system inspections to ensure optimal performance and cleanliness.

Does the Touring XT have any features that promote eco-friendly driving?

Features like the automatic start-stop system and driving modes can help promote eco-friendly driving habits, conserving fuel and reducing emissions.

Are there any tips for optimizing fuel efficiency in the Touring XT?

Practicing smooth acceleration and braking, maintaining proper tire pressure, and avoiding excessive idling can all contribute to improved fuel efficiency.

Can the Legacy Touring XT run on alternative fuels, such as E85 or hybrid power?

The Touring XT typically runs on regular gasoline, but Subaru offers hybrid powertrains in some models for those seeking alternative fuel options.

What role does the transmission play in fuel efficiency for the Touring XT?

The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) in the Touring XT is designed to optimize fuel efficiency by continuously adjusting gear ratios to match driving conditions.

How does the Touring XT handle fuel efficiency in various driving conditions, including city and highway driving?

Subaru engineers the Touring XT to maintain competitive fuel efficiency in both city and highway driving scenarios, with the CVT playing a key role in this balance.

Does the Touring XT have any features for monitoring real-time fuel economy?

Many vehicles, including the Touring XT, offer a digital display that shows real-time fuel economy to help drivers adjust their driving habits for better efficiency.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Fuel, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Starting and Stopping Engine Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Starting and Stopping Engine Touring XT

A cutting-edge and effective engine starting and stopping system that effortlessly blends performance, economy, and comfort is available on the 2023 Subaru Legacy. By just pressing a button, drivers can start the engine with a keyless ignition system, doing away with the need for conventional keys. By momentarily stopping the engine when the car stops, say at a stop sign or in heavy traffic, the automatic start-stop technology further improves fuel economy. The Legacy is an environmentally responsible option because of its clever technology, which lowers pollutants in addition to conserving fuel. A well-rounded driving experience is ensured by harmonizing these advances with a dedication to driver convenience and uninterrupted power delivery.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

Starting engine

WARNING

There are some general precautions when starting the engine.
If the indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering is still locked, and it may result in an accident.

CAUTION

When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing orange, there may be a malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing green after the engine has started, it means that the steering is still locked. Depress the brake pedal while moving the steering wheel to the right and left, and press the push-button ignition switch.
Do not continue pushing the push-button ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. Doing so could cause a malfunction. If the engine does not start, stop pushing the push-button ignition switch. Instead, press the pushbutton ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power status to “OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then push the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

NOTE

After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high.
When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models), the engine
starter operates for a maximum of 10 seconds and after starting the engine, the starter stops automatically.
When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models), the engine can be started regardless of the status of the push-button ignition switch.
If the security indicator light illuminates when you attempt to start the engine but the engine does not start, press the push-button ignition switch
to switch the power to “OFF” and then try to start the engine again.
If the engine does not start, press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to switch the power to “OFF”. Then, while depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models) more forcefully, press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine start procedures may not function depending on the radio wave conditions around the vehicle.
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the steering cannot be unlocked. Charge the battery.
After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high.
It may be difficult to start the engine when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the “ON” position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine.
Do not shift the select lever while the starter is cranking.

Operation indicator
Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT models), the engine will start. The starting procedure for the engine is as follows.

Carry the access key fob, and sit in the driver’s seat.
Make sure the parking brake is applied.
Make sure the select lever is in the “P” position. The engine can also start when the select lever is in the “N” position, however, for safety reasons, start in the “P” position.
Depress the brake pedal until the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green. When starting with the select lever in the “N” position, the indicator does not turn green
While depressing the clutch pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

While pressing the select lever button in, the indicator on the push-button ignition switch will not turn green even when the select lever is in the “P” position.
In case the engine does not start by the normal engine start procedure, move the select lever to the “P” position, and switch the power to “ACC”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch for at least 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only use this engine start procedure in case of emergency.
When the engine is not started, the brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a case, depress the brake pedal more forcefully than usual. Check that the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green, and press the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

Stopping the engine

Stop the vehicle completely.
Move the select lever to the “P” position (CVT models).
Press the push-button ignition switch.

WARNING

Do not touch the push-button ignition switch while driving.
When the push-button ignition switch is operated as follows, the engine will stop.
- The switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer.
- The switch is pressed briefly 3 times or more in succession.
  When the engine stops, the brake booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required on the brake pedal.
  The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be required to steer, and it may result in an accident.
- If the engine stops while driving, do not operate the push-button ignition switch or open any of the doors until the vehicle is stopped in a safe location. It is dangerous because the steering lock may be activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not stop the engine while the select lever is in a position other than the “P” position.
If the engine is stopped while the select lever is in a position other than the “P” position, the power will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is left in this condition, the battery may be discharged.

NOTE

If you press the push-button ignition switch while driving, the emergency engine stop interrupt screen alerts the driver by messages on the combination meter display (color LCD) and beeps.
Although you can stop the engine by operating the push-button ignition switch, do not stop the engine during driving except in an emergency.

Steering lock
After stopping the engine and any door including the rear gate is opened, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. When the engine is restarted, the steering lock will be automatically released.

When the steering lock cannot be released

Operation indicator
Push-button ignition switch

When you cannot restart the engine due to the steering lock, check the status of the operation indicator and perform the following steps.

Operation indicator flashing in green

Check that the select lever is set in the “P” position.
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

Operation indicator flashing in orange
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock function. Immediately contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

FAQ

How does the keyless ignition system work in the 2023 Subaru Legacy?

The keyless ignition system allows drivers to start the engine with the push of a button without inserting a traditional key.

Does the Legacy offer remote engine start?

Yes, some Legacy models may come equipped with a remote engine start feature, enabling drivers to start the engine from a distance using the key fob.

What is the purpose of the automatic start-stop system in the Legacy?

The automatic start-stop system helps improve fuel efficiency by temporarily turning off the engine when the vehicle comes to a stop, such as at traffic lights or in heavy traffic.

How quickly does the engine restart after coming to a stop with the automatic start-stop system?

The engine typically restarts within milliseconds when the driver releases the brake pedal or accelerates, ensuring minimal delay.

Can the automatic start-stop system be manually disabled by the driver?

Yes, drivers usually have the option to disable the system temporarily if they prefer not to use it, although it may automatically reactivate when the vehicle is restarted.

Does the Legacy’s automatic start-stop system have any impact on engine wear and tear?

The system is designed to minimize wear and tear on the engine and components by ensuring smooth and controlled restarts.

Is the automatic start-stop system customizable in terms of sensitivity or behavior?

Some vehicles allow drivers to adjust the system’s sensitivity or disable it entirely through vehicle settings.

Does the automatic start-stop system contribute to reduced emissions?

Yes, by reducing the time the engine spends idling, the system helps lower emissions, making the Legacy more environmentally friendly.

Can the automatic start-stop system be overridden in emergency situations?

In most cases, the system can be overridden by the driver with a firm press on the accelerator pedal during emergency situations.

What is the starting procedure if the key fob’s battery is dead or malfunctioning?

Legacy models typically have backup starting procedures using the physical key blade stored within the key fob.

Is there any maintenance required for the starting and stopping engine systems?

Routine maintenance, such as checking the key fob battery and ensuring proper engine function, is recommended to ensure these systems work optimally.

How does the starting and stopping engine technology contribute to overall driving convenience?

It simplifies the engine starting process and enhances convenience, especially in keyless ignition-equipped vehicles.

Can the automatic start-stop system be manually activated or deactivated by the driver?

It’s typically an automated system, but some vehicles offer a button or setting to manually enable or disable it.

Is there any indication to the driver when the automatic start-stop system is active or inactive?

Most vehicles provide visual or audible cues to inform the driver when the system is active or has been temporarily disabled.

Does the Legacy’s starting and stopping engine technology work seamlessly with other vehicle systems?

Yes, it’s integrated with other systems to ensure a smooth and efficient driving experience without compromising performance or safety.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System), Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Engine Start Touring XT Guidelines

2023 Subaru Legacy Remote Engine Start System Touring XT

The 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT has a great new function called Remote Engine Start that makes modern cars easier to use. This innovative feature lets drivers start the engine from a distance, bringing in a new era of pre-conditioning and ease. It was made to blend technology and comfort in a seamless way. If you press a button on the key fob or maybe even use an app on your phone, the engine starts up. This makes sure that the cabin is comfortable and either warm or cool, based on the weather outside. The Legacy Touring XT makes driving easier and more relaxing, and the Remote Engine Start feature shows how committed Subaru is to meeting the changing needs of modern drivers. This feature changes the way we interact with our cars by letting the engine warm up or cool down before we get in. It adds a level of ease that improves the ride from the moment you step inside. With the Remote Engine Start feature on the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT, the future of driving starts with the touch of a button. This makes driving more comfortable and convenient than ever before.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

WARNING

There are some general precautions when starting the engine.
Do not remote start a vehicle in an enclosed environment (e.g. closed garage). The prolonged operation of a motor vehicle in an enclosed environment can cause a harmful build-up of carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is harmful to your health. Exposure to high levels of carbon monoxide can cause headaches, dizziness, or in extreme cases unconsciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. In addition, the remote engine start system can activate the heater or air conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry. For more details, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for the remote engine start system.

NOTE

The length of time for which it is acceptable to allow the engine to remain idling may be bound by local laws and regulations. Check the local rules when using the remote engine start system.
When taking your vehicle in for service, it is recommended that you inform the service personnel that your vehicle is equipped with a remote engine start system.

Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob)

Fob button

Starting the engine

NOTE
All vehicle doors (including the rear gate) and the engine hood must be closed prior to activating the remote engine start system. Any open entry point will prevent starting or cause the engine to stop. The remote engine start system is activated by pressing the fob button on your remote engine starter transceiver (fob) twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within the operating range of the system and the start request is received, the following will occur.

The fob flashes and beeps once.
The horn sounds once.
- The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.
- If the fob is not within range (the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will indicate two long flashes without beeping.
- The system will check certain safety preconditions before starting, and if all conditions are met, the engine will start within 5 seconds. After the engine starts, the following will occur.
- The fob flashes and beeps twice.
The horn sounds once.
The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.
While the engine is idling via the remote engine start system, the following will occur.
The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights remain illuminated.
The fob button flashes once every 3 seconds.
The power windows are disabled. If the engine turns over but does not start (or starts and stalls) the remote engine start system will power off and then attempt to start the engine 3 additional times.
The system will not attempt to restart the engine if it determines a vehicle malfunction is preventing starting. If the engine does not start after 3 additional attempts, the remote engine start request will be aborted.

Stopping the engine
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2 seconds to stop the engine. The fob will flash and beep three times, indicating the engine has stopped. If the stop request is not received (for example, if the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will continue to flash once every 3 seconds. The system will automatically stop the engine after 15 minutes.

Remote start safety features
For safety and security reasons, the remote engine start system will prevent starting (or stop the engine if running) and sound the horn twice if any of the following conditions is detected. In addition, the fob will flash and beep 3 times.

The total run time has exceeded 20 minutes.
The brake pedal is depressed.
A key is in the ignition switch.
The engine hood is open.
The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500 rpm.
The security alarm is triggered.
The select lever is not in the “P” position.
If the system detects any door (including the rear gate) open during operation, it will prevent starting or stopping the engine, and sound the horn and flash side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.
In addition to the items above, if the vehicle’s engine management system determines there is a safety risk due to a vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will power down and the horn will sound 3 times.

NOTE

If the alarm system is armed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is flashing), the alarm system will remain armed throughout the remote start run cycle.
If the alarm system is disarmed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is not flashing), the alarm system will remain disarmed throughout the remote start run cycle.

Remote start operation fob confirmation
Your remote engine starter fob is a bidirectional transceiver that can confirm system operation with several different visual and audible indications. The fob’s LED-backlit button and the internal piezo buzzer will indicate the status of the system using the following flash and beep sequences, provided the fob is within the operational range of the system.

Precondition	Fob Indication		Meaning
Precondition	Flash	Beep	Meaning
The fob start button is being pressed	Continuous while the button is held down	—	The fob transmits an RF signal
The user attempts to start the engine by pressing the fob button twice within 3 sec	1 flash	1 beep	Engine start request received
	2 flashes	2 beeps	Engine started successfully
	1 flash every 3 sec	—	Engine idling
	3 flashes	3 beeps	The vehicle is in range but the engine has not started
	2 long flashes	—	Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
Engine idling by remote engine start operation	1 flash every 3 sec	—	Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation	3 flashes	3 beeps	Engine stopped by system time-out or for safety reasons (see sections above)
The user attempts to stop the engine by pressing and holding the fob button for at least 2 sec	3 flashes	3 beeps	Engine stopped by user request
	1 flash every 3 sec	—	Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

Alternate Operation Method for Models with “Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

Access key fob

Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the remote engine start transmitter. Operate the lock button to start or stop the engine as follows.

Before starting the engine
Before using the remote engine start system to start the engine, confirm the following conditions.

The select lever is in the “P” position.
All doors including the rear gate are closed.
The engine hood is closed.
The push-button ignition switch is in the “OFF” position.

Starting the engine
To start the engine with the remote engine start system, briefly press the lock button twice within 2 seconds, then press and hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

Press the lock button briefly. The hazard warning flashers then flash once and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
Within 2 seconds, press the lock button briefly again. The hazard warning flashers then flash once again, and the keyless buzzer chirps once again.
After step 2, immediately press and hold the lock button. The hazard warning flashers then flash three times, and the horn will honk once.
Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, release the lock button. The engine will then start successfully.

Stopping the engine
Press and hold the lock button to stop the engine with the remote engine start system.

Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models without “Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System”)

Unlock the vehicle doors using the remote keyless entry system.

NOTE
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system.

Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the “ON” position.
Press any button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut down when any door or rear gate is opened.
Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the “START” position to restart the engine.

Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models with “Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System”)

Unlock the vehicle doors using the keyless access function and remote keyless entry system.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system.
- Turn the push-button ignition switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
- Press any button on the access key fob.
Enter the vehicle. The engine will remain running provided the access key fob is present and detected by the vehicle.
Press the push-button ignition switch once while depressing the brake pedal before driving your vehicle. The remote engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash a hand beep 3 times to indicate that the remote start system has been shut down.

Entering the Vehicle Following the Remote Engine Start Shutdown
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is opened by the remote keyless entry transmitter within a few seconds immediately following the remote engine start shut down.

Preheating or Pre-cooling the Interior of the Vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, set the temperature controls to the desired setting and operation. After the system starts the engine, the heater or air conditioning will activate and heat or cool the interior to your setting.

Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine Starter Transceiver)
New transmitters can be programmed into the remote engine start system in the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, or damaged or additional transmitters are desired (the system will accept up to eight transmitters). New remote engine start transmitters can be programmed according to the following procedure.

Open the driver’s door (the driver’s door must remain open throughout the entire process).
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/ “OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”, then back to “ON” again and leave the ignition “ON” throughout the programming process.
The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights and honk the horn three times, indicating that the system has entered the transmitter learn mode.
Press and release the “ ” button on the transmitter that you want to program.
The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights and honk the horn one time, indicating that the system has learned the transmitter. Upon successful programming, the remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash one time.
Repeat step 5 for any additional transmitters (the system will accept up to eight transmitters).
The system will exit the transmitter learn mode if the key is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed after 2 minutes.

System Maintenance

NOTE
For remote engine starter transceiver: In the event that the vehicle’s battery is replaced, discharged or disconnected, it will be necessary to start the vehicle a minimum of one time using the key prior to activating the remote engine start system. This is required to allow the vehicle’s electronic systems to resynchronize.

Changing the battery

Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
Be careful not to allow children to touch the battery and any re-moved parts; children could swallow them.
There is a danger of explosion if an incorrect replacement battery is used. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery.
Battery should not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.

For remote engine starter transceiver:
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450) supplied in your remote engine start transmitter should last approximately one year, depending on usage. When the battery begins to weaken, you will notice a decrease in range (distance from the vehicle that your remote control operates). Follow the instructions below to change the remote engine start transmitter battery.

Remove the small Philips screw located on the back side lower left corner of the transmitter.
Carefully pry the remote engine start transmitter halves apart using a small flathead screwdriver.
Remove the circuit board from the bottom half of the case remove the battery and replace it with a new one. Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the old battery before removing it to ensure that the new battery is inserted properly (battery “+” should be pointed away from the transmitter circuit board on the battery).
Carefully snap the case halves back together, reinstall the Philips screw, and test the remote engine start system.

Certification for Remote Engine Starter

CAUTION

FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Canada spec models
This device complies with Industry Canada’s license-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause interference
This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

FAQ

What is the Remote Engine Start feature in the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT?

The Remote Engine Start feature allows you to start your 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT’s engine from a distance using the key fob or a smartphone app.

How does the Remote Engine Start work?

With the key fob or smartphone app, you can initiate the engine start remotely, allowing the vehicle’s engine to warm up before you enter.

What’s the advantage of using Remote Engine Start?

Remote Engine Start helps to pre-condition the cabin, defrost windows, and warm up or cool down the interior for enhanced comfort before driving.

Can I start the engine remotely using the key fob?

Yes, the key fob usually has a dedicated button for Remote Engine Start, allowing you to start the engine from a distance.

Can I use my smartphone to start the engine remotely?

Some models might offer smartphone apps that allow you to start the engine remotely using a compatible device.

Is Remote Engine Start available on all trim levels of the 2023 Legacy Touring XT?

Remote Engine Start availability can vary based on trim levels and optional packages. Check with your Subaru dealer for details.

How far can I be from the vehicle to use Remote Engine Start?

The range for Remote Engine Start can vary but is typically within a certain distance from the vehicle, often around a few hundred feet.

What’s the maximum runtime for Remote Engine Start?

The runtime for Remote Engine Start is usually limited to a certain duration, often around 10 to 20 minutes, to conserve fuel and prevent excessive idling.

Can I set the climate controls using Remote Engine Start?

Some models allow you to set the desired cabin temperature using Remote Engine Start, so the vehicle is comfortable when you enter.

Can I use Remote Engine Start with a manual transmission?

Remote Engine Start is often not available on vehicles with manual transmissions due to safety considerations.

What happens if I try to drive the vehicle after using Remote Engine Start?

In many cases, you need to insert the key and turn it to the “ON” position before the vehicle can be driven after using Remote Engine Start.

Can I stop the engine remotely after starting it?

In most cases, you need to be inside the vehicle with the key to turn off the engine after using Remote Engine Start.

Is Remote Engine Start secure? Can someone drive away with the vehicle?

Many vehicles have security measures in place, requiring the key to be physically inserted before driving, even after using Remote Engine Start.

Can I schedule the Remote Engine Start in advance?

Some models might offer the ability to schedule Remote Engine Start for a specific time, allowing you to warm up the vehicle before you plan to drive.

Can I use Remote Engine Start to cool down the interior on hot days?

Yes, you can use Remote Engine Start to activate the air conditioning system and cool down the interior on hot days.

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Premium User Guide
Subaru Impreza 2023 Sport 5-Door User Guide
2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, autouserguide, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Remote engine start system, Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Variable Transmission Touring XT Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Continuously Variable Transmission Touring XT

A sophisticated Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) is included in the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT to go along with its potent 2.4-liter turbocharged BOXER engine. This CVT is notable for its smooth, fluid acceleration and improved fuel efficiency, continuously varying the gear ratio to best suit the driving conditions. With its manual mode and paddle shifters, it gives drivers the option to experience more exciting driving with simulated gear shifts. The CVT contributes to the Legacy Touring XT’s reputation for performance, comfort, and dependability by ensuring consistent and efficient power distribution throughout a range of driving circumstances when paired with Subaru’s symmetrical all-wheel drive system. Drivers looking for a mix between power, efficiency, and driving enjoyment will find the car appealing due to its blend of dynamic engine performance and cutting-edge transmission technology.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Continuously variable transmission

WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into the “D” or “R” position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the transmission could be damaged.
Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after the vehicle has completely stopped.
Do not shift from the “D” position into the “R” position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped.
Do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the “N” or “P” position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
Never move the vehicle as follows. Doing so may result in an unexpected accident or malfunction.
Moving rearward by inertia with the select lever set in a forward driving position.
Moving forward by inertia with the select lever set in the “R” position.
When parking the vehicle, first securely apply the parking brake and then place the select lever in the “P” position. Avoid parking for a long time with the select lever in any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.

Continuously variable transmission features
The continuously variable transmission is electronically controlled and provides an infinite number of forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. It also has a manual mode or an “L” position.

NOTE

When the engine coolant temperature is still low, the transmission will shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in order to shorten the warm-up time and improve driveability. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed up.
Immediately after the transmission fluid is replaced, you may feel that the transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from the invalidation of data that the onboard computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.
continuous heavy load conditions such as when towing a camper or climbing a long, steep hill, the engine speed or the vehicle speed may automatically be reduced. This is not a malfunction. This results from the engine control function maintaining the cooling performance of the vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed will return to a normal speed when the engine is able to maintain the optimum cooling performance after the heavy load decreases. Driving under a heavy load must be performed with extreme care. Do not try to pass a vehicle in front when driving on an uphill slope while towing.
The continuously variable transmission is a chain-type system that provides superior transmission efficiency for maximum fuel economy. At times, depending on varying driving conditions, a chain operating sound may be heard that is characteristic of this type of system.
Place the shift boot to the original position after it is lifted. If the select lever is operated with the shift boot in the rolled-up position, the shift boot may have tension and it may disturb the `select lever operation.

Select lever

Select lever button

With the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the select lever button in
Shift while pressing the select lever button in Shift without pressing the select lever

The select lever has four positions, “P”, “R”, “N”, and “And d” and also has a manual gate for using the manual mode.

NOTE

For some models, to protect the engine while the select lever is in the “P” or “N” position, the engine is controlled so that the engine speed may not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is depressed hard.
When you change the select lever position, make sure to move the select lever firmly to the selected position.

P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely. When you park the vehicle, first apply the parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P” position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the mechanical friction of the transmission. To shift the select lever from the “P” position to any other position, you should depress the brake pedal fully then move the select lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.

R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle. To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the vehicle completely then move the lever to the “R” position while pressing the select lever button in. When the ignition switch has been turned to the “ACC” position, the movement of the select lever from the “N” to “R” position is only possible by depressing the brake pedal.

N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled engine. In this position, the transmission is neutral, meaning that the wheels and transmission are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is applied. Avoid coasting with the transmission in neutral. Engine braking has no effect in this condition.

WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the select lever in the “N” (neutral) position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.

D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving. The transmission shifts automatically and continuously into a suitable gear according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. Also, while driving up and down a hill, the transmission assists and controls the driving performance and engine braking while corresponding to the road grade. When more acceleration is required in the “D” position, depress the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift. In this case, the transmission will operate like a conventional automatic transmission. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position. For models with manual mode, if one of the shift paddles behind the steering wheel is operated while driving in the “D” position, the transmission will temporarily switch to the manual mode. In this mode, you can shift into any gear position using the shift paddles. For details about the manual mode, refer to “Selection of manual mode” p373. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission will switch from the manual mode back to the “D” position for normal driving.

While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, the undesired upshift is prevented from taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again. This prevents repeated upshifting and down-shifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTE
The transmission may downshift, depending on the way the accelerator pedal is depressed to accelerate the vehicle again.

Shift lock function

The shift lock function helps prevent the improper operation of the select lever.
The select lever cannot be operated unless the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and the brake pedal is depressed.
The select lever cannot be moved from the “P” position to any other position before the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the brake pedal first, and then operate the select lever.
Only the “P” position allows you to turn the ignition switch from the “ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove the key from the ignition switch.
if the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” position while the select lever is in the “N” position, the select lever may not be moved to the “P” position without depressing the brake pedal and pressing the select lever button.

Shift lock release
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn the ignition switch back to the “ON” position then move the select lever to the “P” position with the select lever button pressed and the brake pedal depressed. If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, check and confirm the following and release the shift lock accordingly.

When the select lever cannot be shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Place the ignition switch in the “ACC” position, then move the select lever to the “P” position with the brake pedal depressed. If the shift lock cannot be released without using the shift lock release button in the above cases, there may be a malfunction in the shift lock system or the vehicle control system. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

Shift lock release using the shift lock release button
Perform the following procedure to release the shift lock.

Apply the parking brake and stop the engine.
Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or cloth and use it to remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock release button is located under the shift lock cover.
While depressing the brake pedal, insert a screwdriver into the hole, press the shift lock release button using a screwdriver, and then move the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, the shift lock system may malfunction. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the select lever from the “D” position to the “M” position to select the manual mode.

Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the combination meter illuminate. The gear position indicator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-7thgear range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gear shift is possible. When the upshift indicator “ ” illuminates, upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator “ ” illuminates, downshifting is possible. When both indicators illuminate, upshifting and downshifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic signals) the gear will be automatically shifted to the 1st position and the downshift indicator will turn off. Gearshifts can be performed using the shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position, pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated on it. To downshift to the next lower gear position, pull the shift paddle that has “−” indicated on it. To deselect the manual mode, return the select lever to the “D” position from the “M” position. While driving with the select lever in the “D” position, if you change gears by operating the shift paddle, the gear position indicator light illuminates and shows the current gear condition.

CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on the shift paddles. Doing so may result in accidental gear shifting.

NOTE
Please read the following points carefully and bear them in mind when using the manual mode.

If you attempt to shift down when the engine speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift pushes the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the downshift is not possible.
If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.
You can perform a skip shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the shift paddle twice in rapid succession.
The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving.
If the temperature of the transmission fluid becomes too high, the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light on the combination meter will illuminate. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe location and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off.

Driving Tips

NOTE

Selection of “L” (if equipped)
“L” is for using engine braking when going down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move the select lever from the “D” position to the “L” position

When selected, the indicator “L” will illuminate on the combination meter. To deselect “L”, move the select lever to the “D” position.
If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction.

On a road surface where there is a risk of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or gravel-covered road), you can pull away from a standstill safely and easily by first selecting the 2nd gear of the manual mode.
Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or “R” position.
Make sure to apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmission.
Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the “D” position. Use the brake instead.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a malfunction.

SI-DRIVE
SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive) works to maximize engine performance, control and efficiency. This system consists of two modes: Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp (S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switches, the character of the power unit changes.

Intelligent (I) mode
For smooth, efficient performance driving

The linear acceleration characteristic of the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal driving usage. The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-balanced performance with greater fuel efficiency and smooth drive ability without stress. Power delivery is moderate during acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency. This is ideal for around-town driving and situations that do not require full power output. It provides better control in difficult driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle response.

Sport (S) mode (if equipped)
For all-around performance driving

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating level of engine performance and control. The throttle becomes more responsive regardless of the engine speed. Delivering maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is ideal for tackling twisting roads and for merging or overtaking other vehicles on the freeway with confidence.

SI-DRIVE switches
If any of the SI-DRIVE indicator lights blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer

SI-DRIVE switches

To select the Intelligent (I) mode, press the “I” switch. To select the Sport (S) mode, press the “S” switch.

NOTE

While the engine is cool, you cannot change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.
The next time you turn on the engine, after you turn off the engine in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Intelligent (I) mode.
While the engine is running, if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminates, the SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Intelligent (I) mode. In this case, it is not possible to change to another mode. . If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer.

FAQ

What type of transmission is in the 2023 Subaru Legacy Touring XT?

It features a Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT).

How does the CVT enhance the driving experience in the Touring XT?

The CVT offers smooth, seamless acceleration and improves fuel efficiency by constantly adjusting to deliver the optimal power band.

Is the CVT in the Touring XT different from other Legacy models?

The CVT in the Touring XT is similar to other models but may be tuned to complement the turbocharged engine’s performance.

Does the CVT have a manual mode or simulated gears?

Yes, it typically includes a manual mode with paddle shifters, offering simulated gear changes for a more engaged driving experience.

How does the CVT contribute to fuel efficiency?

By continuously adjusting the gear ratio for optimal performance, the CVT helps maintain efficient engine operation, enhancing fuel economy.

What engine is paired with the CVT in the Touring XT?

The Touring XT is equipped with a 2.4-liter turbocharged BOXER engine.

Does the CVT require special maintenance?

Regular maintenance is recommended, following Subaru’s service schedule, which may include fluid checks and changes.

How does the CVT perform under heavy acceleration?

It provides smooth and linear acceleration, effectively utilizing the turbo engine’s power.

Is there any difference in the CVT’s response in different driving modes?

Yes, driving modes can alter the CVT’s response, adjusting shift patterns for a sportier or more economical drive.

How does the CVT handle steep inclines or declines?

The CVT adjusts to maintain optimal power delivery, ensuring stable performance on inclines and declines.

Does the Touring XT’s CVT have any unique features for enhanced performance?

It may include features like adaptive shift control, and optimizing performance based on driving conditions and style.

How does the CVT interact with Subaru’s Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive?

It works in tandem with the AWD system to provide smooth power delivery and traction in various conditions.

What are the benefits of a CVT over a traditional automatic transmission?

Benefits include smoother acceleration, better fuel economy, and a generally quieter operation.

Can drivers expect a sporty feel from the Touring XT’s CVT?

Yes, especially with the manual mode and paddle shifters, drivers can enjoy a more engaged and sporty driving experience.

Are there any driver-assist technologies that work in conjunction with the CVT?

Technologies like adaptive cruise control and lane-keeping assist may interact with the CVT for smoother operation in traffic and on highways.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Continuously variable transmission, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Driver Monitoring Quick Reference Guide

Subaru Legacy 2023 Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped) Touring XT

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB), a cutting-edge safety device intended to improve protection while reversing, is standard on the 2023 Subaru Legacy. This technology uses sensors around the back of the car to identify possible obstructions. If it senses an impending accident, it immediately applies the brakes to stop or lessen the impact. Designed primarily for low-speed situations like parking or reversing in confined spaces, the RAB system adds a crucial layer of safety by alerting the driver both visually and audibly before using the brakes. This function, which is a part of Subaru’s extensive array of driver-assist technologies, demonstrates the brand’s dedication to safety and driver confidence, especially in difficult or crowded driving situations.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped)

Driver Monitoring System is introduced as DriverFocus in some countries. The Driver Monitoring System monitors possible cases when the driver is not paying attention to the forward direction, and also recognizes individual users. This system warns the driver of inattentive/drowsy driving and can support safe and comfortable driving by automatically retrieving the following settings.

Driver’s position
Climate control setting
Meter setting
Center information display setting
When a user is registered, various settings are automatically retrieved when the user enters the vehicle.

Camera

CAUTION

Always use the utmost care in driving
Overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the Driver Monitoring System could easily lead to a serious accident.
This system cannot detect if the driver is feeling drowsy or is concentrating on safe driving.
It cannot judge if the driver is awake or asleep if their driving abilities have diminished, or if they are concentrating on safe driving.
In some circumstances, the system may not be able to correctly detect the driver’s state.

NOTE

The user recognition camera does not save images, audio, or video.
The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly when sunlight is shining into the vehicle in the following ways.
Sunlight is shining directly (or through glass) onto the user recognition camera.
There are shadows on the driver’s face caused by sunlight (or any light with a strong infrared component).
There are large momentary fluctuations in the strength of the sunlight (or any light with a strong infrared component) shining on the face.
Correct detection may not be possible when a device that includes an infrared light source (such as a commercially available Driver Monitoring System) is installed in the vehicle interior.
The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly at the following times when the driver is wearing glasses or sunglasses.– The sunglasses do not allow the easy passage of infrared light.
The surrounding scenery is reflected strongly in the lenses of the glasses or sunglasses.
The eyes are hidden by the frame of the glasses and the user recognition camera cannot detect the eyes.
The light from an infrared light source (LED) is reflected in the lenses of the glasses or sunglasses.
The driver is wearing an eye patch.
The driver is wearing a hat set deeply over the eyes.
Depending on the type of mask, correct detection of inattentive/drowsy driving may not be possible.
Correct user recognition is not possible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is covered with a mask, muffler, sunglasses, or other item.
The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly when the eyebrows, eyes, nose, or mouth are hidden due to an item that is between the face and the system.
If a thick cover is attached to the steering wheel, then depending on the position set for the tilt/telescopic steering wheel, the cover may block the system’s view of the face, and the system and Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly.
Do not attach any stickers to the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED). If the user recognition camera or infrared light source (LED) is covered by an obstruction, it will not be possible to correctly monitor the driver.
If an accessory is hung from the inside mirror, correct detection may not be possible.
Do not touch the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED) directly with your fingers. If there is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts, it will not be possible to correctly monitor the driver. If there is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts, either wipe them with a soft dry cloth or wipe gently with a damp cloth after first firmly wringing the water out.
If the surface of the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED) becomes scratched, correct detection may not be possible. Be careful that hard objects do not contact these parts.
If there is condensation on the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED), correct detection may not be possible. If there is condensation on these parts, wipe it away with a soft dry cloth.
When registering a user for user recognition, avoid closing your eyes as much as possible.
If the user recognition success rate is low, it is possible that the user is not correctly registered. Delete the registered data and perform registration again.
If a user frequently drives both with glasses and contact lenses, it is recommended that registration be performed both when wearing glasses and when wearing contact lenses.
User recognition starts immediately after entering the vehicle, however, if the user looks downward or at the driver-side mirror for a long time, the user may not be recognized.
When one person among twins or another pair of persons with similar facial features is registered, the other person may be incorrectly recognized as the registered user when entering the vehicle.
If the person in the passenger’s seat leans into the driver’s seat, or in other cases when there are two or more faces near the driver’s seat, the system may not operate correctly.
There are cases when the system concludes that the user’s eyes are closed when the user is looking downward while driving, such as when checking instruments or the navigation screen. In such cases, the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound or the system may otherwise not operate correctly.
If the eyes are narrowed when laughing or when there is a dazzling outside light, the system may judge that the eyes are closed and the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound or the system may otherwise not operate correctly.
The drowsy driving or asleep warning states are recognized from the length of time and percentage of time that the eyes are closed. The drowsy driving warning buzzer will not sound simply when the driver feels sleepy or yawns.
Even when the driver does not feel sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or if he or she blinks frequently, the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound.
The inattentive driving warning buzzer may sound if the driver leans forward or puts his or her head out of the window while driving.
The inattentive driving warning buzzer will not sound when the vehicle is stopped or traveling at slow speed even if the driver is not looking ahead.
The Driver Monitoring System collects and stores data regarding drivers’ facial features. Facial recognition data is stored locally and does not leave the vehicle. It is not transmitted to or stored by SUBARU or anyone else. The Driver Monitoring System may be disabled and any stored driver data may be deleted by following the instructions below. If the Driver Monitoring System is disabled, it will be unable to provide any of its safety or convenience functions.

The functions that are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System setting and the user recognition function setting.

Available functions

			*Driver Monitoring System1**
			ON	OFF
User recognition function*2	ON	Inattentive/drowsy driving warning	Available	Not available
	ON	User recognition function	Available	Not available
	OFF	Inattentive/drowsy driving warning	Available	Not available
	OFF	User recognition function	Not available	Not available

Available function items

			*Driver Monitoring System1**
			ON	OFF
User recognition function*2	ON	Register User	Available	Not available
		Delete User	Available	Not available
		Delete All Users	Available	Not available
		Update Seat and Mirror Position	Available	Not available
		Delete Driver Position	Available	Not available
	OFF	Register User	Not available	Not available
		Delete User	Available	Not available
		Delete All Users	Available	Not available
		Update Seat and Mirror Position	Not available	Not available
		Delete Driver Position	Not available	Not available

The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display.
The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization settings. The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is registered.

Available functions

	The user is registered.	The user is not registered.
User recognition function	Available	Not available

User Recognition Function

Perform registration, retrieving, or deletion of the seat position and outside mirror angle before beginning driving. There is the risk of an accident if registration, retrieving, or deletion is performed while driving. When a user is registered, it is possible to retrieve the following settings.
The combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen Displays the screen that the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

Center information display personalization

Center information displays basic screen Displays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.
The fuel consumption screen Displays the average fuel economy for past driving by that user.

Climate control personalization

Climate control settings
Retrieves the preferred interior temperature, airflow mode selection, and other settings that the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

NOTE
When a recognized user exits the vehicle while the Max A/C mode is on and the push engine switch is turned off, the system stores the setting configured before the Max A/C mode was turned on.

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status
Retrieves the Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

Changing the personalization settings

Item
Driver’s position personalization	Seat position/outside mirror angle	Change the setting by using the center information display customization function.
	Reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle
Meter personalization*	Combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen	When the customization screen linked with the synchronized user function is selected and the setting is changed, it is automatically stored.
Center information display personalization*	Center information display basic screen
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the screen was selected and the setting was changed.

Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning
While driving, the Driver Monitoring System monitors possible cases of driver inattention or drowsiness and warns the driver. When the inattentive/drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display appears.

NOTE

The inattentive/drowsy driving warning operates regardless of the status of the user recognition function.
The inattentive driving warning does not activate when the turn signal is operating or when the select lever is in the “R” position.
warning activates at the same time as usual even when a vehicle ahead or an obstacle is detected. For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for the EyeSight system.

Inattentive driving warning

When the system monitors that the driver may be inattentive, it warns the driver. When the inattentive driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display appears on the combination meter display (color LCD). When the EyeSight system has detected a vehicle ahead or an obstacle in the forward direction, the inattentive driving warning may activate at an earlier time than usual. Refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for the EyeSight system.

Drowsy driving warning
Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warning is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display appears.

	Combination meter display (color LCD)	Center information display	Warning chime
Drowsy driving			Beep, beep… (Continues until the driver’s eyes open.)
Very drowsy			Beep, beep, beep, beep, beep (5 times)
Slightly drowsy		—	Beep
Not drowsy	—	—	—

FAQ

What is the Driver Monitoring System in the 2023 Subaru Legacy?
DMS is a technology designed to monitor driver attention and alertness to enhance safety.

How does the system monitor the driver?
It uses a camera and sensors to track the driver’s eye movement and head position.

What happens if the system detects driver distraction?
The system alerts the driver with visual and audible warnings to regain their attention.

Can DMS recognize different drivers and adjust settings accordingly?
Yes, it can recognize registered drivers and automatically adjust seat positions, climate controls, and other personalized settings.

Is DMS active all the time while driving?
It is typically active whenever the vehicle is in motion, monitoring the driver continuously.

How does the system contribute to overall vehicle safety?
By monitoring driver alertness, it helps prevent accidents caused by distraction or drowsiness.

Does the DMS work in conjunction with other safety systems?
Yes, it integrates with other safety features like lane departure warning and adaptive cruise control for comprehensive safety management.

What kind of alerts does the DMS provide?
It provides audible beeps and visual warnings on the dashboard or infotainment screen.

Can the DMS function be turned off by the driver?
Yes, drivers can deactivate the system if they choose, typically through vehicle settings.

How does DMS handle privacy concerns?
The system is designed with privacy in mind, processing data locally without storing images or sending them externally.

Is DMS effective at night or in low-light conditions?
The system is designed to work in a variety of lighting conditions, including at night.

Does DMS adjust its sensitivity based on driving conditions?
It maintains consistent monitoring but may adjust alerts based on driving conditions and speed.

How does DMS assist in long drives or highway travel?
On long drives, it helps in maintaining driver alertness, reducing the risk of accidents due to fatigue.

What maintenance does the DMS require?
It requires minimal maintenance, mainly ensuring the camera and sensors are clean and unobstructed.

Can DMS detect and respond to medical emergencies?
While it can detect unusual driver behavior, it’s not specifically designed for medical emergency response.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped), Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Reverse Automatic Braking Quick Reference Guide

Subaru Legacy 2023 Reverse Automatic Braking

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a system designed to help avoid collisions or reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected in the reversing direction, the system will notify the driver with a warning sound and may activate the vehicle’s brakes automatically.

WARNING

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is not a system intended to replace the driver’s responsibility to check their surroundings for vehicles or obstacles to avoid a collision.
The driver is responsible for driving safely. Before reversing, be sure to first depress the brake pedal and visually check the surroundings.
There are some cases in which the vehicle cannot avoid collision, because the system operation has limitations. The warning sound or automatic braking may be delayed or may not operate at all even when an obstacle is present.
Make sure to set the Automatic Braking function to OFF when the vehicle is on the free roller or on the chassis dynamometer. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident.
Make sure to set the Automatic Braking function to OFF when towing a trailer. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident.
The system is not designed to detect people (including children), animals, or other moving objects.
Depending on the vehicle condition or the surrounding environment, the sonar sensor’s ability to detect objects may become unstable.

NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system records and stores the following data when automatic braking operates. It does not record conversations, personal information or other audio

Data.

Distance from the object
Vehicle speed
Accelerator pedal operation status. Brake pedal operation status
Select lever position
Outside temperature
The sensitivity setting of the sonar sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development. SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU will not disclose or provide the acquired data to any other third party except under the following conditions.
The vehicle owner has given his/her consent.
The disclosure/provision is based on a court order or other legally enforceable request.
Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Overview
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate the following 2 functions using 4 sonar sensors.

Sonar Audible Alarm function
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system detects objects rearward and warns the driver by warning message on the center information display and warning beeps.
Automatic Braking function
The Automatic Braking function detects objects rearward and if there is a high risk of a collision, the system decelerates the vehicle and controls the braking to reduce damage.

When reversing
When either strong automatic braking or torque control is applied to prevent collision (in this case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound)
When the vehicle is stopped by the system (in this case, the continuous beep will remain sounding)
Object (e.g., a wall)

Detecting range

Detecting range (width): Approximately 6 in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
Range that the system cannot detect: Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the rear of the vehicle
Detecting range (length): Approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a railroad crossing and you are trying to escape by reversing through the crossing gate, the system may recognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and the brake may activate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accelerator pedal or cancel the system.

Operating Conditions
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate when all of the following conditions are met.

EyeSight warning indicator
RAB warning indicator
RAB OFF indicator

The ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The EyeSight warning indicator is off.. The RAB warning indicator is off.
The RAB OFF indicator is off.
The select lever is in the “R” position.
Sonar Audible Alarm function
The Sonar Audible Alarm is set to “ON”. The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h).
Automatic Braking function
The Automatic Braking is set to “ON”. The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE

In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will not operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
- The EyeSight warning indicator is illuminated.
- The RAB warning indicator is illuminated.
In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system cannot be operated.
- The (EyeSight Temporary Stop indicator: White) is illuminated, and the messages corresponding to the EyeSight temporary stop are displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for the EyeSight system.
- The RAB OFF indicator is illuminated.
- In the following cases, the functions may not be able to properly work. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
- A sticker, paint, or a chemical is applied to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
- The rear bumper is modified.
- The rear bumper has been removed and attached.
- The ground clearance is changed due to the vehicle’s loading condition or modification.
- There is damage to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
- The rear bumper is exposed to strong impact, or the rear bumper is deformed.
On a steep hill, the system’s automatic braking ability will be reduced. The system is designed to avoid collisions by automatic hard braking when the vehicle’s reversing speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). However, the system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid collisions in any situation.
If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the driver’s operation may be prioritized. In this branch or railroad crossing bars are present in the reversing direction.
- When reversing on a gravel or grassy area.
- When reversing in an area where objects or walls are adjacent to the vehicle such as narrow tunnels, narrow bridges, narrow roads, or narrow garages.
- A wheel track or hole is present in the ground of the reversing direction.
- When reversing over a drainage cover (grating cover).

- The path of the reversing direction is inclined such as on a steep uphill.
- When reversing downhill.

- Reversing in a garage with a low ceiling or a tunnel.
- There is a patch of snow rearward.
- There is a puddle of water.
- There is an obstacle that is next to an object.
- Going back along a wall.
- The area where the road starts touching dirt and snow
- When reversing on an uneven road.
In circumstances such as the following, it may not be possible to avoid a collision even when the system operates normally.
- Roads are slippery.
- The tire air pressure is not correct.
- The tires have become worn.
- Tire chains are installed.
- Tires that are not the designated size are installed.
- Emergency repairs were performed using a puncture repair kit.
- The suspension was modified.
- Vehicle driving is unstable due to an accident or malfunction.
- The brake warning light is illuminated.

Sonar Audible Alarm Function
When the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is in operation, an audible warning beep will sound in 3 levels to warn the driver of a potential collision.

NOTE
It may take time to display the wall and sound warning beeps after the object is recognized by the Sonar Audible Alarm.

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level	Range of detected object*	Distance indicator	Alarm pattern
Long proximity (object detected)	35 in (90 cm) or more	Green	No warning sound
Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)	28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)	Yellow	Short beeps
Short proximity alert (approaching closer to the object)	20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)	Orange	Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)	20 in (50 cm) or less	Red	Continuous beep

The range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

Obstacle detected and alert level

Long proximity alert (object detected)

35 in (90 cm) or more

Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)

Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)

Short proximity alert (approaching the object closer)

Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)

Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the reversing direction, the range of the detected object will be shown on the center information display.
A warning alarm will sound and, depending on the speed, either torque control to generate engine braking or automatic braking will be applied.

Automatic Braking Function Operation
Object close behind the warning

Automatic braking warning

Warning message

If the system determines the risk of collision with the object. Short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound and either strong automatic braking or torque control will be applied to prevent a collision. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

Depress brake pedal warning

Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal once the vehicle has been stopped by automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message will be displayed on the central information display and the continuous beep will remain sounding. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

NOTE
The Sonar Audible Alarm function and Automatic Braking function are different in operation conditions. Therefore there are cases in which only one of these functions will activate.

WARNING
Depress the brake pedal immediately after the system stops the vehicle by automatic braking. Depending on the conditions of the road surface and tires, the vehicle may not remain stopped, possibly leading to an accident..

After the vehicle is stopped by the system

After the brake pedal is depressed, the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the system will temporarily stop operating. The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the select lever is shifted to a position other than the “R” position. The system will operate again the next time the select lever is shifted to the “R” position.

NOTE

In the following cases, after the vehicle has been stopped by the Re-verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, brake control is released and the electronic parking brake operates. For details about releasing the parking
Always keep the sonar sensor and the rear bumper surface near the sonar sensors clean.
Do not modify the rear bumper.
Do not paint the bumper near the sonar sensors.
Do not apply high-pressure water to the sonar sensors with a high-pressure car-washing machine.
Do not apply strong impacts to the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including the inability to detect objects in the reversing direction. If any strong impact is applied to the rear bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or replacement, or if the area of the rear bumper near the sonar sensors requires repair, paintwork, or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

FAQ

What is Reverse Automatic Braking in the 2023 Subaru Legacy?

Reverse Automatic Braking is a safety feature that helps prevent collisions when the vehicle is in reverse by automatically applying the brakes if an obstacle is detected.

How does the RAB system detect obstacles?

The system uses sensors located around the rear of the vehicle to detect obstacles in the car’s path when reversing.

At what speeds is RAB active?

RAB typically functions at low speeds, commonly in parking lot scenarios or during backing maneuvers.

Can the RAB system be manually turned off?

Yes, drivers can deactivate the RAB system via controls in the vehicle, typically found on the dashboard or through the infotainment system.

How does RAB differ from rear cross-traffic alert?

While RAB is focused on directly preventing collisions by braking, the rear cross-traffic alert warns drivers of approaching traffic from the sides when reversing but doesn’t automatically brake.

Is RAB standard on all 2023 Legacy models?

The availability of RAB varies by trim level and package options. It might not be standard on base models.

How does the system alert the driver before engaging the brakes?

The system typically issues audible beeps and visual alerts on the display to warn the driver of an impending collision.

Does RAB work in all weather conditions?

RAB’s effectiveness can be influenced by weather conditions. Heavy rain, snow, or fog might impair sensor accuracy.

What types of obstacles can RAB detect?

It can detect a range of obstacles, including vehicles, walls, and in some cases, pedestrians.

Is there a speed threshold at which RAB will not engage?

Yes, if the vehicle is reversing above a certain low-speed threshold (specific to the vehicle), RAB may not engage to avoid abrupt and potentially unsafe braking.

How does RAB interact with other safety features in the Legacy?

RAB is part of Subaru’s suite of safety features and works in tandem with others, like the rearview camera and parking sensors, for comprehensive safety.

Can RAB prevent all types of collisions when reversing?

While effective, RAB is not foolproof and may not prevent all collisions, especially with small or fast-moving objects.

How do drivers know when RAB is active?

An indicator light on the dashboard or a message on the infotainment display typically shows when RAB is active.

Are there any limitations to the RAB system?

The system may have limitations, like reduced effectiveness on steep inclines, with certain types of obstacles, or in poor visibility conditions.

How does RAB benefit drivers in everyday driving scenarios?

It greatly assists in parking and reversing situations, reducing the risk of low-speed collisions, especially in tight spaces.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped), Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Power Steering Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Power Steering Touring XT

The cutting-edge electric power-assisted steering (EPAS) technology on the 2023 Subaru Legacy is intended to improve driving enjoyment by offering a snappy and natural steering feel. With lighter steering at lower speeds for easier maneuverability and tighter steering at higher speeds for increased stability and feedback, this system modifies the amount of assistance based on the speed of the vehicle. The Legacy’s overall efficiency is further enhanced by the integration of EPAS, which uses power only when steering assistance is required. This lowers engine workload and improves fuel economy. Furthermore, Subaru’s Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive and other driver-assistance technologies function flawlessly with the power steering system, guaranteeing a safe, enjoyable, and engaging drive in a variety of road conditions.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Power Steering

Power steering warning light

The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the power steering warning light on the combination meter illuminates to inform the driver that the warning system is functioning properly. Then, if the engine starts, the warning light turns off to inform the driver that the steering power assist is operational.

CAUTION
While the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.

The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during parallel parking.
The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.
At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However, this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering wheel is not operated for a while and the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in a nonstandard way which causes power assist limitation to occur too frequently, this may result in a malfunction of the power steering control system.

Braking Tips
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads.

When the brakes get wet
When driving in the rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

Brake System

Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual-circuit brake system. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.

Electronic Brake booster
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic brake booster to provide additional braking force. Do not turn off the ignition switch while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power. The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, you will have to depress the pedal much harder than during normal braking, and the braking distance will increase.

NOTE
When the following operations are performed, an operating sound from the electronic brake boost control module may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

The brake pedal was operated.
The driver’s door was opened.
The EyeSight function was activated.
Several minutes have passed after the engine stopped.

Supplemental booster function when pressure fails
If there is a malfunction in the braking system, the power for the braking will be stored by controlling the hydraulic pressure of the VDC system. When the brake pedal is depressed while the supplemental booster function is operating, an operation sound and brake pedal vibration may be generated.

Brake assist system
Do not be overconfident about the brake assist. It is not a system that brings more braking ability to the vehicle beyond its braking capability. Always use the utmost care when driving regarding vehicle speed and safe distance.

CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly, continue depressing the brake pedal strongly to bring the effect of the brake assist. Brake assist is a driver assistance system. It assists the brake power when the driver cannot depress the brake pedal strongly and the brake power is insufficient. Brake assist generates the brake power according to the speed at which the driver depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the following phenomena occur. However, even though these occur, they do not indicate any malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating properly.
You might feel that the brake pedal is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force.
You might hear the sound of ABS operating from the engine compartment.

Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators

The disc brake pad wears warning indicators on the disc brakes giving a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving with an ABS-equipped vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

The ABS does not always decrease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe following distance from other vehicles.. When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or over newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. When driving under these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and leave ample distance from other vehicles.
When you feel the ABS operating, you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS.

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up. When the ABS is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates. The ABS will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

ABS Self-Check
You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating noise of the ABS from the engine compartment just after the vehicle is started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS being carried out and does not indicate any abnormal condition.

ABS Warning Light
Refer to “ABS Warning Light”.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System
The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS and uses some of the ABS components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD function fails, the EBD system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

EBD System Malfunctions

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stops working and the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously.

The brake system warning light
ABS warning light
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

If both warning light remains on even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be a problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

FAQ

What type of power steering system is used in the 2023 Subaru Legacy?

The 2023 Legacy utilizes an electric power-assisted steering (EPAS) system.

How does the electric power steering enhance driving feel?

EPAS provides a more responsive and smoother steering feel, adjusting the level of assistance based on vehicle speed and steering input.

Does the power steering system vary its assistance based on speed?

Yes, the system offers more assistance at lower speeds for easier maneuverability and less at higher speeds for better road feel and stability.

Is there any customization available in the steering settings?

While the Legacy doesn’t typically offer customizable steering settings, the steering is optimally tuned for a balance of comfort and responsiveness.

How does the power steering system contribute to fuel efficiency?

Electric power steering is more efficient than hydraulic systems as it only uses power when steering assistance is needed, reducing engine load and improving fuel efficiency.

Does the Legacy’s power steering have any special features for safety?

The system works in conjunction with driver-assist technologies like lane-keeping assist, offering corrective steering inputs to help maintain lane discipline.

How does the steering system respond in emergency maneuvers?

The system is designed to provide quick and accurate responses, ensuring that the vehicle responds effectively to sudden steering inputs.

What is the steering wheel’s turning diameter?

The exact turning diameter can vary by model and tire size, but the Legacy generally offers a tight turning radius for its class, enhancing maneuverability.

Does the Legacy feature a variable gear ratio steering system?

While not explicitly stated, many modern vehicles, including the Legacy, use steering systems that effectively alter the steering ratio based on speed and steering angle.

How does the steering system interact with Subaru’s Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive?

The steering system complements the AWD by providing stable and predictable steering, especially important in slippery conditions where AWD is most beneficial.

Are there any maintenance requirements for the Legacy’s power steering system?

Electric power steering systems generally require less maintenance than hydraulic systems, with no fluid changes needed, but regular check-ups are recommended.

How does the steering feel change when driving in different modes (if applicable)?

Driving modes mainly affect throttle response and transmission settings; the steering feel remains relatively consistent across modes.

What feedback does the power steering system provide to the driver?

The system is designed to convey enough road feel to the driver for a connected driving experience while filtering out unwanted harshness.

How does the steering system contribute to the overall driving dynamics of the Legacy?

It plays a crucial role in ensuring that the vehicle is responsive to driver inputs, stable at high speeds, and easy to maneuver at low speeds.

Can the power steering system be manually adjusted or overridden?

The system is fully integrated and automated, so manual adjustments or overrides are not typical features.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Power steering, Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Vehicle Dynamics Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Vehicle Dynamics Control System Touring XT

The remarkable vehicle characteristics of the 2023 Subaru Legacy, designed to provide a responsive and enjoyable driving experience, make it stand out. With Subaru’s well-known Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive system, this midsize sedan provides excellent traction and stability under a variety of driving circumstances. It usually has a choice between a powerful turbocharged alternative and a dependable four-cylinder engine under the hood, offering a well-balanced combination of performance and efficiency. The steering and braking systems of the Legacy are designed for exact control and reactivity, and its suspension is expertly adjusted to provide a comfortable ride. The car also has driver-assist systems and cutting-edge safety technologies, which make it a great option for anybody looking for a safe and comfortable driving experience.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

Even if your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.
Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an indication that the road on which the vehicle is traveling has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.
Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have an inspection of that system performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly:
- All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires.
- Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver’s side door pillar.
- When replacing a flat tire, use only the specified temporary
If non-matching tires are used, If non-matching tires are used, spare tires. However, even with the specified temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be reduced.
If non-matching tires are used, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may not operate correctly.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system adjusts the engine’s output and the wheels’ respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control.

Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to prevent the spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is shown by flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.
Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is shown by flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

NOTE

- The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.
- Slight twitching of the brake pedal is felt.
  The vehicle or steering wheel shakes to a small degree.
- An operating sound from the engine compartment is heard briefly when starting the engine and when driving off after starting the engine.
The brake pedal seems to jolt when driving off after starting the engine.
In the circumstances shown in the following list, the vehicle may be less stable than it feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate a system malfunction.
- On gravel-covered or rutted roads
- On unfinished roads
- When the vehicle is towing a trailer
- When the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or winter tires.
Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will cause the operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly different compared to that for normal conditions.
It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner, even if your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire. Failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly.

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor

To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System
To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on and off, operate the center information display. Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control system temporarily may help to escape from the following situations. Turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control system off when necessary.

A standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface
Extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control” has been touched again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. You should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under the above-mentioned situations.

CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle motion such as skidding using control of the brakes and engine power. Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unless it is absolutely necessary. If you must turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, drive very carefully based on the road surface condition.

NOTE

When “Vehicle Dynamics Control” has been touched to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and the engine is restarted.
When “Vehicle Dynamics Control” has been touched to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicle’s running performance is comparable with that of a vehicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except when absolutely necessary.
Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, components of the brake control system may still activate. When the brake control system is activated, the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light flashes.

X-MODE (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with X-MODE could easily lead to a serious accident.
Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with a hill descent control function could easily lead to a serious accident. Be especially careful, and depress the brake pedal if necessary when driving on extremely steep downhill, frozen, muddy, or sandy roads. Failure to control the vehicle’s speed may cause a loss of control and result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

Even if your vehicle is equipped with X-MODE, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having X-MODE does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.
Activate X-MODE when you encounter a very slippery surface at low speed. However, having X-MODE is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions. When activating X-MODE, the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.
Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have the system inspected by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
Observe the following precautions in order to ensure that X-MODE is operating properly:
- All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires.
- Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the label attached to the vehicle’s

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

Press or turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Creating adequate driving wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may help to recover from the loss of traction. Use the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as necessary.

A standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface
Extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow door pillar.
- Use only the special temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire. With a normal temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of
  X- MODE is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.
- If the hill descent control function has operated continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake disc may increase and the hill descent control function may be temporarily disabled. In this case, the hill descent control indicator will disappear. When the hill descent control indicator disappears, the hill descent control function is disabled.

X-MODE is the integrated control system of the engine, AWD Vehicle Dynamics Control system, etc. for driving in bad road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can drive more comfortably even in slippery road conditions including uphill and downhill.

X-MODE has the following functions.

Hill descent control function: Using the hill descent control function, you can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is likely to increase, the brake control system will be activated to adjust the vehicle speed.
Driving ability control:
This mode increases the hill-climbing ability and driving ability as well as enables smooth application of torque for easier control of the steering wheel.

To Activate/Deactivate X-MODE

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)
X-MODE indicator

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)

DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator
SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

To activate or deactivate X-MODE operate the center information display.

X-MODE control (models with 1 mode

Speed range

Low-speed range (less than 25 mph

(40 km/h))

Medium to high-speed range (25 mph

(40 km/h) or higher)

Outback

X-MODE:

Available

X-MODE: Not

available*3

X-MODE control (models with 2 modes)

Speed range

Low-speed range (less than 25 mph

(40 km/h))

Medium to high-speed range (25 mph

(40 km/h) or higher)

Subaru Outback Wilderness

DEEP SNOW/MUD: Avail-

able*1*2

SNOW/DIRT:

Available

X-MODE: Not

available*4

Outback

DEEP SNOW/

MUD: Available

SNOW/DIRT:

Available

When DEEP SNOW/MUD is operating,
X- MODE is automatically switched to the low-speed range when the vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) and to the high-speed range when the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. However, it is not possible to switch to SNOW/DIRT while the vehicle is operating in the high-speed range. If you attempt this, the buzzer sounds twice.
To switch DEEP SNOW/MUD off, operate the center information display.
If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 m/h) or more while X-MODE is activated, a buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will be deactivated.
If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated, a buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will be deactivated. X-MODE will automatically reactivate when the vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h.

NOTE

Even if you try to activate X-MODE when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, X-MODE will not be activated. At this time, a buzzer will sound twice.
While the engine is running, if any of the following conditions is met, X-MODE will be deactivated. In this case, it is not possible to activate
- The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminates.
- The AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes.
- The ABS warning light illuminates.
- The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light illuminates.
If the engine could overheat because of a temperature increase of the engine coolant, it may not be possible to activate X-MODE.
Even while X-MODE is activated, X-MODE will be deactivated when the engine coolant temperature increases.
The Auto Start-Stop system will be stopped while X-MODE is activated.
Models with 2 modes:
SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving on a snow-covered road where the points of contact between the tires and road surface are visible, or for driving on an unpaved road.
DEEP SNOW/MUD is suitable for driving on a road covered with deep snow where the points of contact between the tires and road surface are not visible, or for driving on a muddy road.
If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated, a buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will be deactivated. When you use the cruise control after X-MODE is automatically deactivated, X-MODE will not be automatically reactivated when the vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h).

Hill Descent Control Function
The hill descent control function will be in standby mode when X-MODE is activated and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). The function will operate when the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less than approximately 10%. The function will turn off when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

CAUTION
The braking power of the hill descent control function may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

Even while the hill descent control function is operating, you can vary the vehicle speed using the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
During braking by the hill descent control function, the stop lights will illuminate.
The hill descent control function is operable regardless of the gradient of the road.
The hill descent control function may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.
- An operating sound is heard briefly from the engine compartment while the hill descent control function is operating.
- The sensation of depressing the brake pedal is different, (harder than usual, etc.) when the brake pedal is depressed during hill descent control function operation.

Hill descent control indicator

This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in standby mode. It flashes while the function is operating. It will disappear when the function is in disabled mode. When this function is changed from operational to non-operational, it will disappear when the vehicle speed reaches more than approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
When the switch is pressed or turned during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light “ ” on the combination meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated and the vehicle will behave like a model not equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system. When the switch is pressed again (type A) or turned to the “NORMAL” side (type B) to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system deactivated, traction and stability enhancement offered by the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is unavailable. Therefore, you should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under the above-mentioned situations.

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

Low tire pressure warning light

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure.
Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Slowly pull off the road to a safe location.
Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance, the tires get warm and their pressures increase accordingly. The tire pressure monitoring system does not function when the vehicle is stationary. After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS rechecking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low-pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or another qualified service shop as soon as possible.
Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if the sealant residue is properly cleaned off. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for app approximately a minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal parts in the cargo area. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.

FCC ID: CWTD1G141
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

TPMS Screen

This screen displays each tire pressure.

FAQ

What type of all-wheel-drive system does the 2023 Subaru Legacy use?
The 2023 Subaru Legacy uses Subaru’s Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive system, designed to provide optimal balance and even power distribution for maximum traction and stability.

What engines are available in the 2023 Legacy?
The Legacy offers two engine choices: a 2.5-liter four-cylinder BOXER engine and an optional 2.4-liter turbocharged four-cylinder BOXER engine for higher trims.

How does the Legacy’s suspension contribute to its vehicle dynamics?
The Legacy features a finely tuned suspension system, which balances comfort for long drives with enough stiffness to provide responsive handling and reduce body roll in corners.

What type of transmission does the 2023 Legacy have?
It comes with a Lineartronic CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission) that provides smooth and efficient power delivery.

How does the Legacy’s weight distribution affect its handling?
The Legacy’s weight is distributed to enhance stability and handling, with a design that lowers the center of gravity, aiding in better cornering and overall control.

Does the 2023 Legacy have any driving modes?
Yes, the Legacy offers selectable driving modes that adjust the throttle response and transmission behavior to suit different driving conditions and preferences.

What braking system is used in the 2023 Legacy?
The Legacy is equipped with a four-wheel disc brake system that provides reliable and consistent stopping power, along with features like ABS and brake assist for enhanced safety.

How does the steering system in the Legacy enhance the driving experience?
The Legacy features an electric power-assisted steering system that is tuned for a balance of responsiveness and ease, providing a direct feel with comfortable steering effort.

What role does the vehicle’s aerodynamics play in its performance?
The aerodynamic design of the Legacy reduces wind resistance, enhancing fuel efficiency and contributing to a quieter cabin at high speeds.

How does the Legacy handle in adverse weather conditions?
Thanks to its Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive, the Legacy offers excellent traction and stability in various conditions, including rain, snow, and slippery roads.

What tire options are available for the Legacy, and how do they affect its dynamics?
The Legacy typically comes with all-season tires that provide a good balance of performance in various conditions, with options for different sizes and performance characteristics based on the model.

Is there any specialized technology for stability control in the Legacy?
Yes, the Legacy is equipped with Subaru’s Vehicle Dynamics Control (VDC), which includes stability and traction control systems to maintain vehicle stability.

How does the vehicle’s weight affect its acceleration and braking?
The Legacy’s weight, along with engine choice, influences its acceleration, with the turbocharged option providing a quicker response. The well-engineered braking system ensures effective stopping power despite the vehicle’s weight.

Are there any driver-assist technologies in the Legacy that impact its dynamics?
The Legacy includes driver-assist technologies like adaptive cruise control and lane-keeping assist, which can subtly adjust steering and speed, enhancing both safety and driving dynamics.

What is the turning radius of the 2023 Legacy, and how does it aid in maneuverability?
The Legacy’s turning radius is designed to be tight, aiding in better maneuverability in city driving and when parking.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual, Vehicle Dynamics Control System

Legacy Subaru

2023 Subaru Legacy Rear View Camera Guidelines

Subaru Legacy 2023 Rear View Camera Touring XT

Rear view camera systems are standard on the 2023 Subaru Legacy, which greatly improves driving convenience and safety. This camera, which comes standard on all Legacy models, is positioned strategically next to the license plate and turns on by itself when the car is put in reverse. It offers better visibility, particularly in confined parking spaces or when reversing in crowded locations, by displaying the area behind the car in clear, color on the infotainment screen of the automobile. The system’s dynamic guidelines, which adapt in response to steering input, help with precise distance measurement and reverse maneuver navigation. The 2023 Subaru Legacy’s rearview camera, which is made to function well in a variety of lighting scenarios, is a vital feature that helps make driving safer and more certain, especially in urban and parking areas.

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

A rearview camera is attached to the trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness). When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and the select lever is set to “R”, the rearview camera automatically displays the rear view image behind the vehicle on the central information display.

WARNING

Since the rearview camera uses a wide-angle lens, the image on the monitor is different from the actual view in terms of distance.. Since the range of the image on the monitor is limited, always check the rearview and the surrounding area with your eyes and mirrors, and move backward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking the rearview image from the camera could cause an accident.
Do not disassemble or modify the camera, switch or wiring. If smoke comes out or you smell a strange odor, stop using the rearview camera immediately. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Continued use may result in an accident, fire or electric shock.

CAUTION

When washing your vehicle with a high-pressure washer, do not allow water to touch the camera directly. Entry of water in the camera lens may result in condensation, malfunction, fire or electric shock.
Since the camera is a precision device, do not subject it to strong impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, fire or electric shock may occur.. If mud or snow sticks to or is frozen on the camera, you must be very careful when removing it. Otherwise, damage to the camera may cause a fire or electric shock. Pour water or lukewarm water over the camera to remove mud and ice, and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Do not put a flame close to the camera or wiring. Otherwise, damage or fire may occur.
When replacing the fuse, be sure to use a fuse with the specified rating. Use of a fuse with a different rating may result in a malfunction.
If you use the rearview camera for a long time while the engine is not operated, the battery may become completely discharged.

NOTE

Do not wipe the camera with alcohol, benzene or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with a diluted neutral detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to apply the wax to the camera. If it comes in contact with the camera, moisten a clean cloth with a diluted neutral detergent to remove the wax.
The camera lens has a hard coating to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehicle or cleaning the camera lens, be careful not to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a washing brush directly on the camera lens. The image quality of the rearview camera may deteriorate. Strong light shined on the camera lens may develop vertical lines around the light source. This is not a malfunction. Under the fluorescent light, the display may flicker. However, this is not a malfunction. The image of the rearview camera may be slightly different from the actual color of the objects.

How to Use the Rear View Camera
When the select lever is set to “R”, the rearview camera automatically displays the rear view image from the vehicle. When the lever is set to other positions, the image before setting to “R” is displayed.

Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
Set the select lever to “R”.

NOTE

The image of the rearview camera is horizontally reversed as is the case with the vehicle’s inside mirror or outside mirror.
When “Rear Camera Delay Control” is on, the rearview image will be displayed on the central information display for a certain period of time after the select lever is shifted to a position other than the “P” position from “R”.
It may be difficult to see the image of the rearview camera in the following cases. This is not a malfunction of the camera.
The vehicle is in a dark place (at night, in a tunnel, etc.).
The vehicle is in an extremely hot or cold place.
An object (such as raindrops, snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the view of the rearview camera sticks to the lens of the camera.
Strong light is shining directly on the camera lens (occasionally, there are vertical lines on the screen).

Viewing Range on the Screen

CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with the rearview camera is limited. Always be sure to check with your eyes when moving backward and proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.

Range of ~~view~~

Range of view

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the bumper and areas just under the bumper cannot be viewed. Also, the image from the rearview camera looks shorter than the actual distance.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be viewed. If there is an object that has a wide projection on its upper part such as a sign pole behind the vehicle, the projection cannot be seen on the screen.

Help Lines
The helplines are a guide to help you realize the actual distance from the screen image.

NOTE
If you shift to the “R” range within several seconds after turning on the ignition switch, the warning message may not be displayed. Wait for several seconds after turning on the ignition switch before shifting to the “R” range. Then, the warning message will be displayed.

Helplines

Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
Approx. 10 f t (3 m) from the bumper(green horizontal line)
Approx. 6 f t (2 m) from the bumper (green horizontal line)
Approx. 3 f t (1 m) from the bumper (yellow horizontal line)
Approx. 1.5 f t (0.5 m) from the bumper (red horizontal line)
Vehicle centerline
Dynamic guidelines
When the select lever is set to “R”, the monitor screen displays the helplines together with the rearview image.

CAUTION

When moving backward, always check the back with your eyes without relying on the help lines. Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.
The actual position may be different from the indication of the helplines.
Differences may occur due to the. Differences may occur due to the. When the vehicle is on a slope or inclined against the road, the indication is different from the actual position.

NOTE
When “Steering Angle Lines” is off, the dynamic guidelines will disappear on the central information display.

Difference between the screen image and the actual road
The distance markers show the distance for a level road when the vehicle is not loaded. It may be different from the actual distance depending on the loading conditions or road conditions.

When there is an upward slope at the back

3 f t (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance.

When there is a downward slope at the back

3 f t (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer than the actual distance.

NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rearview distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance as in an upward slope.

Feature of distance marker

The distance marker shows the distance on the road. If there is a car or another object close behind, distance cannot be correctly displayed.

BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner radars with Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross Traffic Alert. These functions of BSD/RCTA are the systems that detect objects and vehicles to the rear and draw attention to the driver when changing a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when changing lanes or reversing the vehicle. The system is designed to assist the driver in changing lanes or reversing safely by monitoring the rear and side areas of the vehicle. However, you cannot rely on this system alone to ensure safety during a lane change or reversing. Overconfidence in this system could result in an accident and lead to serious injury or death. Since the system operation has various limitations, the flashing or illumination of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may be delayed or it may not operate at all even when a vehicle is present in a neighboring lane or approaching from either side. The driver is responsible for paying attention to the rear and side areas of the vehicle.

System Features
BSD/RCTA consists of the following functions.

To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind Spot Detection)
To detect a vehicle approaching from the right or left while reversing the vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) The system uses rear corner radars for the following features.

NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been certified by radio wave-related laws applicable in the U.S. and other FCC-compliant countries, including Canada. When driving your vehicle in countries other than the U.S. and Canada, you must obtain certification for the country where you are driving the vehicle. For more information on certification in the U.S. and other FCC-compliant countries, including Canada, refer to “Certification for the BSD/RCTA”

Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

Operating range

The system notifies the driver of the presence of vehicles in its blind spot.

If the system detects a vehicle in its blind spot, it warns the driver by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s).
If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator.

Lane Change Assist (LCA)

Operating range

The system notifies the driver of vehicles approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes.

If the system detects a vehicle approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s).
If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another vehicle approaching from either side when driving in reverse. This feature helps the driver check the rear and side areas of the vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side while moving backward, it warns the driver of dangers in the following way.
The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
A warning buzzer sounds.
An icon appears on the center information display.

Limitations of the detectability of RCTA
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, the RCTA may not operate properly in angled parking.

Example 1

The detection range of the rear corner radars
Area out of detection range of the rear corner radars
Vehicles that may not be detected
Parked vehicle

WARNING
An approaching vehicle (A) may not be detected because the detection range is limited by the parked vehicle (B). Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

Example 2

The detection range of the rear corner radars
Vehicles that may be detected

NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle (C) is passing in front of your vehicle. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

System Operation

Operating conditions
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the following conditions are met.

The ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7 mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
The select lever is in the “R” position (RCTA only).
The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears.
The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator does not appear (except when reversing).

NOTE

In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will appear.
When a malfunction occurs in the system, including the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears, exercise proper caution.
In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will temporarily stop operating (or may stop operating) and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will appear.
- When the rear corner radars become significantly misaligned (If the orientation of the rear corner radars is shifted for any reason, readjustment is required. Have the sensor adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
- When a large amount of snow or ice sticks to the rear bumper surface around the rear corner radars
- When the vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road or in an environment in which there are no objects around (such as in a desert) for a prolonged period of time
- When the temperature around the rear corner radars increases excessively due to long driving on uphill grades in the summer, etc.
When the temperature around the rear corner radars becomes extremely low
When the vehicle battery voltage lowers
When the vehicle voltage exceeds the battery voltage rating
The BSD/RCTA will resume operation once these conditions are corrected, and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears for a prolonged period of time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
The detectability of the rear corner radars is restricted. The BSD/RCTA detection may be impaired and the system may not operate properly under the following conditions.
- When the rear bumper around the rear corner radars is distorted
- When ice, snow or mud adheres to the rear bumper surface around the rear corner radars
- When stickers, etc. are affixed on the areas of the rear corner radars on the rear bumper
- During adverse weather conditions such as rain, snow, or fog
When driving on wet roads such as snow-covered roads and through puddles. The rear corner radars may not detect or may have difficulty detecting the following vehicles and objects.
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, stationary objects on the road or roadside, etc.– Vehicles with body shapes that the radar may not reflect (vehicles with lower body height such as a trailer with no cargo and sports cars)
Vehicles that are not approaching your vehicle even though they are in the detection area (either on a neighboring lane to the rear or alongside your vehicle when reversing)(The system determines the presence of approaching vehicles based on data detected by the rear corner radars.)
- Vehicles traveling at significantly different speeds
- Vehicles driving in parallel at almost the same speed as your vehicle for a prolonged time
- Oncoming vehicles
- Vehicles in a lane beyond the neighboring lane
Vehicles traveling at a significantly lower speed than you are trying to overtake. On a road with extremely narrow lanes, the system may detect vehicles driving in a lane next to the neighboring lane.

BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning Buzzer
While the BSD/RCTA is active, the following item(s) will operate to alert the driver

The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light (when there are vehicles in the neighboring lanes).
The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle is approaching from the left or right side while your vehicle is reversing)

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light It is mounted on each side of the outside mirrors. The indicator light will illuminate when a vehicle approaching from behind is detected. The indicator light will flash to warn the driver of dangers under the following conditions.

While the indicator light is illuminating, if the turn signal lever is operated toward the side in which this light is turned on
When reversing the vehicle while the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light dimming function
When the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

You may have difficulty seeing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light under the following conditions.– When sunlight shines directly on it
When the headlight beams from a vehicle traveling behind shines directly on it. While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position, even if the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will not be reduced.
BSD/RCTA approach warning buzzer (only when reversing)A warning buzzer sounds along with flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume can be changed by operating the center information display.

Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer

In the following cases, the operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings.
When a vehicle moves to the neighboring lane from a lane next to the neighboring lane
- When driving on a steep incline or on repeated sharp uphill and downhill grades
- When going beyond a pass
- When both your vehicle and a vehicle driving on a neighboring lane are driving on the far side of each lane.
- When several narrowly spaced vehicles are approaching in a row
- In low-radius bends (tight bends or when making turns at an intersection)
- When there is a difference in height between your lane and the neighboring lane
- Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is activated by touching “BSD/RCTA”
- Immediately after the select lever is shifted to the “R” position
- When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the trunk or cargo area. During reversing, the operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings under the following conditions.
- When backing out of an angled parking space
- When a large-sized vehicle is parked next to your vehicle (That vehicle prevents the propagation of radar waves.)
- When reversing on sloped roads
- When reversing at a high speed

The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may illuminate when driving close to solid objects on the road or roadside (such as guardrails, tunnels, and sidewalls).
When turning at an intersection in urban areas, or a multilane intersection, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash.
If a building or a wall exists in the reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash and the warning buzzer may sound.
In the following cases, the system may detect a vehicle driving two lanes away from your vehicle.
When your vehicle drives on the near side of its lane from the corresponding vehicle
When the vehicle driving two lanes away drives on the near side of its lane from your vehicle

BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator
System temporary stops

BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system is used at extremely high or low temperatures or when abnormal voltage exists. Once these conditions are corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear. If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

System temporary stops due to reduced radar sensitivity

BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due to reduced radar sensitivity
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectability of the rear corner radars is reduced. Once the condition is corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear. If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator
System malfunction

BSD/RCTA malfunction message
At first, this message will appear
Then this message will appear
BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off, operate the center information display. When the BSD/RCTA system is turned OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) will illuminate.

NOTE

In the following cases, turn off the BSD/RCTA system. The system may not operate properly due to blocked radar waves.
When towing a trailer (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)
When a bicycle carrier or other item is fitted to the rear of the vehicle
When using a chassis dynamometer or free roller device, etc.
When running the engine and making the wheels rotate while lifting up the vehicle. If the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known status of the system is maintained. For example, if the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position with the BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA remains deactivated the next time the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

Certification for the BSD/RCTA

The U.S. and other FCC-compliant countries

FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

BSD/RCTA
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Canada spec models This device contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s license-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause interference.
This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

Handling of Rear Corner Radars

Rear corner radars (Legacy)

Rear corner radars (Outback/Subaru Outback Wilderness)

The rear corner radars, one on each side of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear bumper.

CAUTION
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/RCTA, observe the following precautions.

Always keep the bumper surface near the rear corner radars clean.
Do not affix any stickers or other items on the bumper surface near the rear corner radars. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.
Do not modify the bumper near the rear corner radars.
Do not paint the bumper near the rear corner radars.
Do not expose the bumper near the rear corner radars to strong impacts. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including the inability to detect vehicles entering the detection areas. If any strong shock is applied to the bumper, be sure to contact your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
Do not disassemble the rear corner radars.

NOTE
If the rear corner radars require repair or replacement, or the bumper area around the rear corner radars requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

FAQ

Does the 2023 Subaru Legacy come with a rearview camera?

Yes, a rear-view camera is standard in all 2023 Subaru Legacy models.

What is the primary function of the rearview camera?

It provides a live video feed of the area behind the vehicle to assist with safe reversing and parking.

Is the camera’s display in color or black and white?

The display is in color, offering clear and detailed visibility.

Where is the rearview camera located?

It’s typically located near the license plate at the rear of the vehicle.

Does the rearview camera have night vision or low-light capabilities?

The camera is designed to provide enhanced visibility in low-light conditions, but it does not have true night vision.

Can the camera angle be adjusted manually?

The camera angle is fixed and cannot be manually adjusted.

How does the rearview camera activate?

It automatically activates when the vehicle is put into reverse.

Is there a cleaning feature for the camera lens?

The Legacy does not have an automatic cleaning feature for the camera lens; it should be cleaned manually as needed.

Does the rearview camera integrate with the vehicle’s infotainment system?

Yes, the camera’s feed is displayed on the vehicle’s infotainment screen.

Are there any parking assist lines displayed with the camera feed?

Yes, the camera system includes dynamic guidelines that help in judging distances and angles while parking.

Is the camera quality affected by weather conditions?

Extreme weather conditions might affect visibility, but the camera is designed to be weather-resistant.

Does the rearview camera have any zoom or panoramic features?

The standard rearview camera does not typically include zoom or panoramic features.

Can the rearview camera be used while driving forward?

No, the camera is only active when the vehicle is in reverse.

How is the rearview camera powered?

It is integrated into the vehicle’s electrical system and does not require separate power.

Is the camera view customizable in terms of display settings?

The display settings are generally fixed and not customizable.

Useful Link

View Full User Guide: Subaru Legacy 2023 Touring XT User Guide

Download Manuals: https://www.subaru.com/owners/vehicle-resources/manuals.html

2024 Subaru Legacy Specs, Price, Features, Mileage (Brochure)

Tags 2023, Legacy 2023, Owner Manual, Rear View Camera, Starting Operating, Subaru, Subaru Legacy, User Guide, User Manual

Subaru Impreza 2023 Seatbelts Base Sedan User Guide

Seatbelt safety tips

Children

Expectant mothers

Seatbelt warning light and chime

Fastening the seatbelt

Unfastening the seatbelt

Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt)

Seatbelt maintenance

Subaru Impreza 2023 Top Accessories

Reference Links

Related Article

Subaru Legacy 2023 Parking Your Vehicle Touring XT

Parking your vehicle

Electronic parking brake

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Touring XT

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)

Glossary of tire terminology

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Cooling system Touring XT

Cooling System

Engine Coolant

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Maintenance Tips Touring XT

Maintenance tips

Removing and reinstalling clips

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Maintenance schedule Touring XT

Maintenance schedule

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Tire Information Touring XT

Tire information

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Replacing key battery

Replacing key battery

Brake Pad

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Fuses Touring XT

Fuses

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Wheel Replacement Touring XT

Wheel replacement

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Tires and wheels Touring XT

Tires and wheels

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Brake fluid Touring XT

Brake fluid

Checking the fluid level

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Exterior Care Touring XT

Exterior care

Cleaning alloy wheels

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Jump starting Touring XT

Jump starting

Towing

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Access key fob –If Access key fob Touring XT

Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly

FAQ

Useful Link

Subaru Legacy 2023 Vehicle In Case Of An Emergency Touring XT

If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

FAQ

Useful Link